Technical Reference
March 2006
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
© 2006 Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, Kentucky 40550
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. Lexmark is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Your product uses a laser.
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
•
Your product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must
understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of
harmful emissions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
TOC-1
Contents
Overview.............................................................................................................1-1
Navigational Tips................................................................................................1-4
Printing the File...................................................................................................1-4
Bibliography........................................................................................................1-5
Selecting PCL Emulation....................................................................................2-1
Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................2-1
Using Your Software Program ......................................................................2-2
Page Formatting.................................................................................................2-3
Printable Areas..............................................................................................2-3
Lexmark C760 and C762 ..............................................................................2-4
Print Area Menu Item..........................................................................................2-5
Command Structure .........................................................................................2-31
Control Codes .............................................................................................2-31
Commands..................................................................................................2-31
PCL Emulation Commands ..............................................................................2-34
GL/2 Commands ..............................................................................................2-56
Raster Image Graphics.....................................................................................2-60
Raster Compression Mode .........................................................................2-60
Macros..............................................................................................................2-67
PJL Command Notation .....................................................................................3-1
Kernel Commands..............................................................................................3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
TOC-2
Job Separation Commands................................................................................3-4
Status Readback Commands...........................................................................3-54
Status Message Format ...................................................................................3-61
Information Messages.................................................................................3-61
Auto-Continuable Conditions ......................................................................3-63
Attendance Conditions................................................................................3-67
Service Errors .............................................................................................3-80
Device Attendance Commands........................................................................3-80
Unique PJL Commands....................................................................................3-82
File and Device Protection Commands ............................................................3-93
Protecting a File or Device..........................................................................3-93
Recovering Lost Passwords........................................................................3-98
Selecting PostScript Emulation ..........................................................................4-1
Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................4-1
Using Your Software Program ......................................................................4-2
Paper Tray Support.......................................................................................4-4
Envelope Size Support..................................................................................4-9
Envelope Tray Support ...............................................................................4-11
Page Device Parameters..................................................................................4-48
Interpreter Parameters .....................................................................................4-62
User Parameters.........................................................................................4-62
System Parameters.....................................................................................4-65
Device Parameters......................................................................................4-71
Status and Error Messages..............................................................................4-92
Tagged Binary Not Active ...........................................................................4-92
Tagged Binary Active..................................................................................4-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
TOC-3
Status Messages.........................................................................................4-93
SmartSwitch .......................................................................................................5-1
Printer Job Language .........................................................................................5-2
Sniffing................................................................................................................5-3
Password Protection...........................................................................................6-7
Rewriting the Flash Content ...............................................................................6-8
Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation.........................................................6-9
File Naming Conventions..............................................................................6-9
Device Search Order...................................................................................6-12
Performance.....................................................................................................6-13
Job Buffering ....................................................................................................6-13
Creating a Partition .....................................................................................6-14
Enabling Job Buffering................................................................................6-14
Disabling Job Buffering ...............................................................................6-15
Airflow Requirement......................................................................................7-1
Noise Emission Levels..................................................................................7-1
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................7-2
Power Requirements.....................................................................................7-2
Physical Specifications..................................................................................7-3
......................................................................................................................7-3
Clearance Requirements ..............................................................................7-3
Environmental Conditions .............................................................................7-4
Altitude Specifications...................................................................................7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
TOC-4
Atmospheric Pressure...................................................................................7-4
Setting Up the Communications Port .................................................................8-2
Deciding Which Interface to Use ........................................................................8-6
Parallel Interface.................................................................................................8-7
Standard Parallel Connector.........................................................................8-8
Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize.................................................................8-8
Parallel Mode 1...........................................................................................8-14
Parallel Mode 2...........................................................................................8-15
Signal Descriptions .....................................................................................8-15
Network Support...............................................................................................8-28
Input Buffer.......................................................................................................8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-1
CHAPTER 1: Introduction
Overview
The following edition of the Technical Reference contains information about printer
commands and printer languages supported by the Lexmark C760 and C762 printers.
To determine which commands and languages your printer supports, see the
appendixes in the back of this document or see your printer documentation.
If your printer is not included in this edition of the Technical Reference, it may be
available in another version. Visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/
publications for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-2
Printed documentation is also available for some Lexmark printers. Obtain the correct
part number from the following table, call 1-800-553-9727, and select option #1 to
order a Technical Reference for your printer.
Table 1-1: Technical Reference Documentation Available in Hard Copy
If you need a Technical Reference for the...
Order Lexmark part number...
Optra™ K
Optra N
11A4079
11A9979
11C0905
12A2194
Optra SC
Optra E310
The Technical Reference is divided into the following:
Shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, GL/2
commands, and resident font and symbol set support.
Contains detailed information about certain commands that cause the printer to enter
PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), and
many other types of commands.
Provides information about PostScript emulation and explains PostScript emulation
supplemental operators.
Describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to
choose one method over another.
Provides information about using the flash memory and hard disk. It describes how to
manage printer memory, store resources (such as fonts and macros), and manage
files.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-3
Lists printer specifications, including information about hardware and environmental
conditions.
Provides information on printer interfaces, including information about parallel and
serial interface, network support, and communication protocols.
See the tables in the three appendixes to determine if your printer supports a
particular PCL emulation, PJL, or PostScript emulation command. The appendixes
are:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-4
Navigational Tips
If you are not familiar with PDF files, the following tips may help you find the
information you need.
• To move forward and backward through this document:
— Select an option under View in the menu bar at the top of the page.
— Use the arrows in the toolbar at the top of the page, or the up arrow and
down arrow keys on the keyboard.
— Press the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard.
— Use the scroll bar to the right of the page.
— Click the page number box on the status bar at the bottom of the page and
type the page you want.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the pages:
— Select the magnifying glass icon on the toolbar at the top of the page and
then draw a box around the area you want to view.
— Click the magnification box on the status bar and select an option from the
drop-down menu.
• To jump directly to a particular section or key word in this document:
— Click one of the bookmarks in the overview window to the left of the page.
— Click a topic in the table of contents.
— Select Tools from the menu bar and then choose Find or Search.
— Click the binoculars icon on the toolbar and then type a word in the text box.
— Click a cross-reference to a figure, page number, or heading in the docu-
ment itself.
Printing the File
Although this book was designed primarily for online viewing, you can print a hard
copy by clicking File on the toolbar, and then choosing Print. Make sure you’ve
selected the correct printer, range of pages, and number of copies before you click
OK. You should be aware that if you print this document on a color printer, the color
you see on the paper may not match the color you see on your computer monitor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-5
Bibliography
For detailed information about PCL emulation printer commands, PostScript
emulation printer commands and operators, and interfaces, refer to the following
documentation:
• Hewlett-Packard DeskJet Printer Family Technical Reference, C2121-90101
• Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4 Typography and Graphics, Random House
Electronic Publishing
• Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual, 5961-0635
• Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual,
5961-0509
• Hewlett-Packard PostScript SIMM Technical Reference, I/O Device
Operators and Parameters, C2080-90921
• Hewlett-Packard Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual,
5961H0512
• IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, S68X-2330
• Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications
Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange, Electronic Industries
Association, publications EIA RS-232C and EIA\TIA-232-E
• Network Printing Alliance Protocol, A Printer/Host Control Specification
Developed by the NPA, Level 1, Revision N
• PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition), Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Addison-Wesley Publishing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-1
CHAPTER 2: PCL Emulation
When you select PCL emulation as the printer language, the printer supports the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet Printer Command Language. This chapter
shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, along
with resident PCL emulation font and symbol set support.
Selecting PCL Emulation
Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface (for example,
Parallel, USB, Serial Option 1, or Network Option 1), the printer automatically switches
to the printer language being sent by your software program. The printer is shipped
with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages in all interfaces. The printer
examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and
PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional
If SmartSwitch is set to Off for both printer languages, you can select PCL emulation
from your printer operator panel or from MarkVision™ Professional. See your printer
documentation for information on changing menu settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-2
Using Your Software Program
To select PCL emulation, use the Printer Job Language (PJL) Enter Language
See “Printer Job Language” on page 3-1 for the syntax and use of PJL.
Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose some or all previously
downloaded resources, unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources
are stored in flash memory or on disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-3
Page Formatting
The printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation (both portrait and landscape
orientation) are illustrated below. See the Legend that follows for definitions of areas
A through I.
Printable Areas
Legend:
A
B
C
D
E
F
Portrait physical page width and landscape physical page length
Portrait physical page length and landscape physical page width
Portrait logical page width
Landscape logical page width
Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in portrait
Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in landscape
Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and logical page
G
H
Distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in
portrait, or distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and printable
area in landscape
I
Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and the printable area in
portrait, or distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the
printable area in landscape
area labeled on the preceding diagram for all paper and envelope sizes your
printer supports. If information about your printer is not included in the
Reference for your printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-4
Lexmark C760 and C762
The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and
envelope sizes the Lexmark C760 and C762 printer supports. For more information
about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas”
Table 2-1: Lexmark C760 and C762 Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Paper/Envelope
Dimensions
1
Selection
Page Size
Dimensions by Area (pels)
2
Parameters Name
mm
inches
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Paper
13, 613
12, 45, 612
26, 626
26, 626
1, 601
2, 602
3, 603
4 or 10
15
A5
148 x 210
182 x 257
210 x 297
210 x 297
184 x 267
216 x 279
216 x 356
216 x 330
5.83 x 8.27
3496
4300
4960
4960
4350
5100
5100
5100
3300
4960 3196 4720 142 118
6070 4000 5830 150 120
7014 4676 6778 142 118
7014 4800 6778 80 118
6300 4050 6060 150 120
6600 4800 6360 150 120
8400 4800 8160 150 120
7800 4800 7560 150 120
5100 3000 4860 150 120
150 120
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100 100
100 100
JIS B5 Paper
7.2 x 10.1
8.3 x 11.7
8.3 x 11.7
7.25 x 10.5
8.5 x 11
3
A4 (198 mm)
A4 (203 mm)
Executive
Letter
80
80
80
80
3
100 100
100 100
100 100
100 100
100 100
100 100
100 100
Legal
8.5 x 14
Folio
8.5 x 13
Statement
Universal
139.7 x 215.9 5.5 x 8.5
216 x 356 8.5 x 14
431.8 x 279.4 17 x 11
101
6 or 11
11 x 17
6600 10200 6300 9960 150 120
(Ledger)
1
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi.
2
3
The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software
application.
4
Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same
logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark
4039.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-5
Table 2-1: Lexmark C760 and C762 Paper and Envelope Dimensions
Paper/Envelope
Dimensions
1
Selection
Page Size
Dimensions by Area (pels)
2
Parameters Name
mm
inches
Envelope
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
90
91
DL
220 x 110
229 x 162
250 x 176
216 x 356
8.66 x 4.33
9.02 x 6.38
9.84 x 6.93
8.5 x 14
2598
3826
4156
5100
5196 2314 4960 142 118
5408 2542 5172 142 118
5904 3872 5668 142 118
8400 4800 8160 150 120
0
0
0
0
100 100
100 100
100 100
100 100
C5
4
99 , 100
600
B5 Envelope
Other
Envelope
89
81
80
9 (Com 9)
225 x 98
8.875 x 3.875 2326
5324 2024 5084 150 120
5700 2174 5460 150 120
4500 2024 4260 150 120
0
0
0
100 100
100 100
100 100
10 (Com 10)
241 x 105
9.5 x 4.125
2474
2326
7 3/4
(Mondarch)
1
Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi.
2
3
Page Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-12 on page 2-36.
The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software
application.
4
Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same
logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark
4039.
Print Area Menu Item
The printable area is the area on a sheet of paper within which a pel can be printed.
Logical page is a conceptual entity that defines the area in which margins (top, bottom,
left, right) may be set and the area in which the PCL cursor may be positioned.
The physical page border is the actual physical boundaries of a page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-6
The Print Area menu item is available from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. For some printers, Print Area supports three values: Normal,
Whole Page, and Fit to Page. See your printer documentation for more information.
Normal setting
Whole Page setting
Legend:
PCL
Physical
Page
Border
PCL
Printable
Area
Logical
Page
Area
Only Portrait Orientation is shown for all settings.
The Normal setting, which is the factory default, means the printable area includes the
entire page except the narrow border around the edge of the page. This is the
nonprintable area. The printer measures margin settings relative to the logical page.
For a more detailed explanation of the Normal setting, see “Printable Areas” on
The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed when using PCL emulation. If
Whole Page is selected, the PCL language sets the logical page area equal to the
physical page dimensions. Since the logical page dimensions and the physical page
dimensions are the same, in theory, the cursor may be positioned anywhere on the
page. However, the PCL language clips the image to the printable area. So, the Whole
Page setting is useful for printing scanned images that extend from edge to edge of a
page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-7
Some printers offer the Fit to Page setting. When Fit to Page is selected, PCL
emulation or PostScript emulation formats a page using a printable area equal to the
physical page, which is from one edge of the page to the other edge of the page. If
you use this setting, no clipping occurs. In Fit to Page, the PCL emulation logical page
dimensions are equal to the physical page dimensions, as in the Whole Page setting.
The printer holds this formatted image in memory, but when the page prints, the image
is compressed a small amount in both horizontal and vertical directions, and then
centered on the physical page for letter-size paper only. This process creates a small
margin around the image. This artificial margin prevents printing from one edge to the
other, since doing so could contaminate the printer and cause printing problems.
The following illustrations show an image held in memory for printing from one edge
to the other and how the image would actually print based on the Fit to Page setting.
Notice that a small border appears at the edges of the printed page, and the image is
slightly compressed.
Physical
Page
Edge
Formatted Image with Fit to Page
Printed Image with Fit to Page
Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C760
and C762
Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and
two bitmapped fonts.
Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include
symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable
fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped
fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-8
print the font sample pages using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on
page 3-83.), or through MarkVision Professional (network models only). See your
printer documentation for more information.
A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for
each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 resident symbol sets. The tables
PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets.
You can select a font as the PCL emulation default through MarkVision Professional
(network models only). See your printer documentation for more information.
The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 to R46) shown on
the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47
to R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation,
but now also work in the PCL emulation. The final five fonts (R86 to R90) are
additional specialty PCL fonts. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, see
tables list both the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands. For
information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-20.
For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job
Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is
You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the
number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or
76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning
on page 2-9 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the
symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set
as the default.
Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER,
PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-9
Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C760
and C762
Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward
compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the
Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers.
Standard PCL Emulation Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font
selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical,
they are listed together in the table.
Table 2-2: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Courier
Spacing
Style
0
Weight
Typeface
4099
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
Courier Italic
1
4099
Courier Bold
0
4099
Courier Bold Italic
CG Times
1
4099
0
4101
CG Times Italic
1
4101
CG Times Bold
0
4101
CG Times Bold Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold
1
4101
0
4148
1
4148
0
4148
Univers Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Arial
1
4148
0
16901
16901
16901
16901
16602
16602
16602
1
0
1
0
Arial Italic
1
Arial Bold
0
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-10
Table 2-2: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name
Arial Bold Italic
Spacing
Style
1
Weight
Typeface
16602
4102
4102
4102
4148
4148
4148
4148
4197
4197
4197
4197
4113
4113
4113
4113
4168
4168
4168
4362
4362
4140
4297
4116
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
3
0
0
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
1
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
Letter Gothic
0
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Kursiv
1
0
4
5
4
5
0
1
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
CG Omega
0
1
0
CG Omega Italic
1
CG Omega Bold
0
CG Omega Bold Italic
Antique Olive
1
0
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
1
0
0
Albertus Extra Bold
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Marigold
0
4
0
Coronet
1
Line Printer 16
0
1
POSTNET Barcode
0
0
Wingdings
0
31402
16686
Symbol
0
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-11
Type 1 Fonts
Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and
backward compatibility modes and nine of the fonts work only in the forward
compatibility mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your
software program selects these fonts.
The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are
supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the
Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted.
Table 2-3: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward Compatibility Mode
Backward Compatibility Mode
Weight Typeface
Type 1 Font name
Helvetica
Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Style
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
4
5
4
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
-3
-3
2
2
0
0
2
2
0
24580
24580
24580
24580
24580
24580
24580
24580
24591
24591
24591
24591
24623
24623
24623
24623
24607
24607
24607
24607
24703
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
4
5
4
5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
-3
-3
2
2
0
0
3
3
0
61444
61444
61444
61444
61444
61444
61444
61444
61455
61455
61455
61455
61487
61487
61487
61487
61471
61471
61471
61471
61463
Helvetica Italic
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Italic
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
ITC Avant Garde Book
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
1
ITC Avant Garde Demi
1
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
Century Schoolbook Roman
1
Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-12
Table 2-3: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued)
Forward Compatibility Mode
Backward Compatibility Mode
Weight Typeface
Type 1 Font name
Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Style
Century Schoolbook Italic
Century Schoolbook Bold
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
-3
-3
5
5
0
0
24703
24703
24703
45099
24579
24579
24579
24579
25093
25093
25093
25093
24580
24580
24580
24580
45358
45101
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
3
3
0
61463
61463
61463
61483
3
CourierPS
3
CourierPS Oblique
3
CourierPS Bold
3
CourierPS Bold Oblique
3
Times Roman
3
Times Italic
3
Times Bold
3
Times Bold Italic
2
Helvetica Light
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
-3
-3
5
61444
61444
61444
61444
2
Helvetica Light Oblique
2
Helvetica Black
2
Helvetica Black Oblique
5
3
SymbolPS
ITC Zapf Dingbats
1
0
0
61485
1
Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold.
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers.
2
3
Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a
Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The
Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches
the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility
modes are:
Forward
ESC%- 12345X@PJ L DEFAULT LPARM: PCL LFONTCOMPATI BI LI TY=PCL6
@PJ L RESET
ESC%- 12345X
Backward
ESC%- 12345X@PJ L DEFAULT LPARM: PCL LFONTCOMPATI BI LI TY=PCL5
@PJ L RESET
ESC%- 12345X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-13
Specialty PCL Fonts
The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward
compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts. Since the font selection
commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are
listed together in the table. These fonts are supported only in PCL 5, not in PCL XL.
Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands
Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode
Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing
Style
Weight
Typeface
32774
32772
32777
23584
23590
1
C39 Narrow
C39 Regular
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
C39 Wide
1
OCR-A
1
OCR-B
1
This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-14
Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C760 and C762
To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of
Table 2-5: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1
Latin 1
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Courier
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Courier Italic
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic
CG Times
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-15
Table 2-5: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
Latin 1
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Arial
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Arial Italic
Arial Bold
Arial Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Garamond Antiqua
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
CG Omega
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-16
Table 2-5: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
Latin 1
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
Antique Olive
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Marigold
Coronet
Helvetica
Helvetica Italic
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Italic
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
Palatino Roman
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-17
Table 2-5: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
Latin 1
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Palatino Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
ITC Avant Garde Book
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demi
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
Century Schoolbook Roman
Century Schoolbook Italic
Century Schoolbook Bold
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
CourierPS
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Bold Oblique
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-18
Table 2-5: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1
Latin 1
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Times Roman
Times Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Helvetica Light
Helvetica Light Oblique
Helvetica Black
Helvetica Black Oblique
Line Printer 16
POSTNET Barcode
C39 Narrow
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
C39 Regular
C39 Wide
OCR-A
OCR-B
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Wingdings
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Symbol
SymbolPS
ITC Zapf Dingbats
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-19
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Courier
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Courier Italic
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic
CG Times
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Medium ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Medium Italic ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman
Italic
Times New Roman
Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Times New Roman
Bold Italic
Arial
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Arial Italic
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-20
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Arial Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Arial Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Univers Condensed
Medium
Univers Condensed
Medium Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Univers Condensed
Bold
Univers Condensed
Bold Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Halbfett
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Garamond Kursiv
Halbfett
CG Omega
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold
Italic
Antique Olive
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-21
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Clarendon
Condensed Bold
Marigold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Coronet
Helvetica
Helvetica Italic
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow
Italic
Helvetica Narrow
Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Helvetica Narrow
Bold Italic
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-22
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
ITC Bookman Light
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ITC Bookman Light
Italic
ITC Bookman Demi
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ITC Bookman Demi
Italic
ITC Avant Garde
Book
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ITC Avant Garde
Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde
Demi
ITC Avant Garde
Demi Oblique
Century Schoolbook ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Roman
Century Schoolbook ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Italic
Century Schoolbook ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Bold
Century Schoolbook ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery
Medium Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
CourierPS
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-23
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
CourierPS Bold
Oblique
Times Roman
Times Italic
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Helvetica Light
Helvetica Light
Oblique
Helvetica Black
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
Helvetica Black
Oblique
Line Printer 16
POSTNET Barcode
C39 Narrow
C39 Regular
C39 Wide
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
OCR-A
OCR-B
Wingdings
Symbol
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-24
Table 2-6: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek
Latin 2
Latin 5
Latin 6
Cyrillic
Greek
Typeface / Symbol
Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
SymbolPS
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ
ITC Zapf Dingbats
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Courier
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Courier Italic
Courier Bold
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-25
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Courier Bold Italic
CG Times
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman BoldItalic
Arial
Arial Italic
Arial Bold
Arial Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Univers Condensed Medium
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-26
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
CG Omega
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Marigold
Coronet
Helvetica
Helvetica Italic
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-27
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Helvetica Bold
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Italic
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
ITC Avant Garde Book
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demi
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
Century Schoolbook Roman
Century Schoolbook Italic
Century Schoolbook Bold
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-28
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
CourierPS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Bold Oblique
Times Roman
Times Italic
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Helvetica Light
Helvetica Light Oblique
Helvetica Black
Helvetica Black Oblique
Line Printer 16
POSTNET Barcode
C39 Narrow
C39 Regular
C39 Wide
OCR-A
OCR-B
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-29
Table 2-7: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials
Specials
Typeface / Symbol Set
PJL Value
Symbol Set ID
Wingdings
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Symbol
SymbolPS
ITC Zapf Dingbats
ꢀ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set.
ꢀ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set.
All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following
19 symbol sets.
Table 2-8: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets
Symbol Set ID Symbol Set / Typeface
1E
0U
0S
0I
ISO 4: United Kingdom
ISO 6: ASCII
ISO 11: Swedish for Names
ISO 15: Italian
2S
1G
0D
1F
2U
0F
0G
0K
ISO 17: Spanish
ISO 21: German
ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1
ISO 69: French
ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version)
ISO 25: French
ISO: HP German
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-30
Table 2-8: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued)
Symbol Set ID Symbol Set / Typeface
2K
3S
1S
6S
4S
5S
1D
ISO 57: Chinese
ISO 10: Swedish
ISO: HP Spanish
ISO 85: Spanish
ISO 16: Portuguese
ISO 84: Portuguese
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-31
Command Structure
This section introduces the different types of PCL emulation commands and their
structure, or syntax. It also demonstrates how you can link commands to abbreviate
them.
Control Codes
Control Codes are single-character instructions.
Table 2-9: Control Codes
Code Dec
Hex
Function
Result
BS
8
08
Backspace
Moves the cursor toward the left margin one horizontal space equal to
the last printed character
HT
LF
9
09
0A
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop
10
Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position on the following line
as determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or Set Line
Spacing command
FF
12
0C
Form Feed
Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position at the top margin of
the next page
CR
SP
SI
13
32
15
14
0D
20
0F
0E
Carriage Return
Space
Moves the cursor to the left margin
Moves the cursor to the right one column
Selects the primary font
Primary Font
Secondary Font
SO
Selects the secondary font
Commands
PCL commands are multibyte strings (also known as “escape sequences”) that begin
with the Escape control code (ESC, ←, decimal 27, or hexadecimal 1B). The ESC control
code notifies the printer that the characters that follow are to be interpreted as part of
a command and are not control codes or data to be printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-32
Command Structure
Most PCL emulation commands have the following structure:
ESC
& a # C
Spaces have been added to this example for readability. The command parameter
variables are indicated by a number sign (#).
Table 2-10: Description of Command Structure
Element
Description
ESC
Decimal 27 or hex 1B
&
a
Parameterized character from American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange (ASCII) table (ranging from 33 to 47 decimal)
Group character from ASCII table (ranging from 96 to 126 decimal) that specifies a
group type of control
#
Decimal character string value within specified numeric ranges; may be preceded by
a + or - sign and contain a decimal point
C
Termination character from ASCII table (ranging from 64 to 94 decimal)
Command Parameters
A command parameter sets the value for a command. This value stays constant until
either a different value resets the command or a command resets the printer to the
default values. For example, after the printer receives a command that selects a right
margin beginning at column 63, the right margin of each printed page begins at
column 63. That margin stays constant until a right margin command with a different
value resets it or until the printer is reset.
Parameters for each command are listed in the command tables beginning on
for each parameter. To determine a decimal or hex value, first locate the value of the
parameter you require in the Symbol Set Table. The decimal value is the value shown
in the bottom of the cell or box with that parameter. To find a hex value, go straight up
the grid from the desired parameter and read the value in the top heading. This is the
first character of the hex value. Next, go straight across the grid to the left of the
parameter and read the value in the left column heading. This is the second character
of the hex value. For example, ESC (←) is coded 1B in Hex and 27 in decimal. (Any one
of the three values ←, 1B, or 27 might be used in your application. Read your
documentation to determine which to use.) The example on the following page sets
the pitch of the primary font to 16.66 characters per inch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-33
Example:
ESC(s16.66H
• Decimal: 27 40 115 49 54 46 54 54 72
• Hex: 1B 28 73 31 36 2E 36 36 48
Use the plus symbol (+) or the minus symbol (-) to select a position relative to the
current cursor position. For example:
ESC&a6C
ESC&a+6C
ESC&a-6C
Move to horizontal cursor position, column six
Move six columns to the right of the current position
Move six columns to the left of the current position
Linking Commands
You can combine PCL emulation commands by linking them if the first 3 bytes of the
commands are identical. The combined, short form sends the first 3 bytes only once
in the string. To combine commands:
• Use the first 3 bytes (characters) of the command only once at the start of the
command string.
• Make the last letter of each command in the string lowercase.
• Capitalize the last letter of the string.
For example, notice that the first 3 bytes of these two commands are the same:
ESC(s10H
Select 10 characters per inch
ESC(s4099T Select Courier typeface
To combine these two commands, use this form:
ESC(s10h4099T
which is 3 bytes shorter than the long form:
ESC(s10HESC(s4099T
You can combine more than two commands; for example, you can add Select Stroke
Weight Bold (ESC( s 3B) to the previous two commands:
ESC(s10h3b4099T
or in the long form:
ESC(s10HESC(s3BESC(s4099T
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-34
PCL Emulation Commands
See the following tables for a listing of the commands grouped by function.
PCL Emulation Commands by Function
Table 2-11: Job Control
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Printer Reset
ESCE
• Prints any partial pages.
• Resets printer environment to defaults.
• Deletes all temporary downloaded resources.
ESC&d#A
Number of Collated Copies
0 = Collation off
1 ... 999 (number of Copies)
ESC&l#X
Turns collation of pages off or sets the number of collated copies.
Number of Copies
# = number of Copies (1 to 32767)
Default = 1
Affects the page currently in process and subsequent pages.
ESC&l#S
Simplex/Duplex Print
0
1
2
Single-Sided (Default)
Duplex Long-Edge Binding
Duplex Short-Edge Binding
Long-edge or short-edge binding refers to the side of the physical page
where binding occurs.
100 Manual Duplex First Sides
101 Manual Duplex Second Sides
ESC&l#U
Long-Edge Offset Registration
# = number of Decipoints
Range = -32767 to 32767
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0
Also known as Left Offset.
Adjusts placement of logical page along the width of the physical page.
ESC&l#Z
Short-Edge Offset Registration
# = number of Decipoints
Range = -32767 to 32767
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0
Also known as Top Offset.
Adjusts placement of logical page along the length of the physical
page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-35
Table 2-11: Job Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Unit of Measure
ESC&u#D
Range = (96, 100, 120, 144, 150, 160, 180,
200, 225, 240, 288, 300, 360, 400, 450, 480,
600, 720, 800, 900, 1200, 1440, 1800, 2400,
3600, 7200)
Sets the size for the PCL Unit (units per inch).
The Unit of Measure defines the unit used in the following commands:
• Horizontal Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#X)
• Vertical Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#Y)
• Horizontal Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#A)
• Vertical Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#B)
Default = 300 units per inch
The Unit of Measure also affects the rounding of character
escapements and the Horizontal Motion Index.
Note: This command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster
data for bitmapped fonts, raster graphics, or user defined fill patterns.
ESC% — 12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL
This command terminates the current printer language and allows
switching into PJL. For more information, see “UNIVERSAL EXIT
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-36
Table 2-12: Page Control
Command / Parameters
ESC&l#A
Function / Result
Set Page Size
Paper
Selects the physical size of the paper, which also determines the
paper and envelope dimensions your printer supports.
1
2
Executive
Letter
3
Legal
Folio
Ledger (11 x 17)
A5 Paper
Statement
A4 Paper
A3 Paper
B5 Paper
B4 Paper
Custom Paper/Universal
If the requested page size is not in the requested source or if no source
is requested, sources are checked for the requested size in the
following order: multipurpose feeder, tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4,
tray 5, and envelope feeder.
4, 10
6, 11
13, 25
15
26
27
12, 45
46
101
Notes:
• When the printer receives the page size command, any partially
formatted pages are printed, and the cursor position and margins
are reset.
• Duplex printing is not supported on any envelope.
• The size loaded in the active source is checked to see if it matches
the requested size. If the multipurpose feeder is configured as
Cassette or Manual, the same applies; however, if the multipurpose
feeder is configured as First and media is loaded in the
multipurpose feeder, then, regardless of media size, it is the source
used until it is empty.
Envelopes
80
81
89
90
Monarch 7 3/4
Commercial 10
Commercial 9
DL
91
C5
99, 100
600
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
ESC&l#H
Paper Source
0
1
2
3
4
5
Active Source or Eject Page
Tray 1 (Default)
Manual Paper Feed
Manual Envelope Feed
Tray 2
Selects the paper feed source.
Note: If the paper source is changed for the back of a duplexed page,
a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the
information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of
a page sent from the new paper source.
Tray 3
6
7
Optional Envelope Feeder
Auto Select
8
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
20
21
62
Optional Paper Source
ESC&f#G
Set Universal Width
# = number of Decipoints
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC&f#F
Sets the width of the Universal size in decipoints.
Set Universal Height
# = number of Decipoints
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Sets the height of the Universal size in decipoints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-37
Table 2-12: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Set Universal Feed Direction
ESC&f#O
0
1
Short-edge
Long-edge
Sets the feed direction of Universal size. Feed direction means which
side of the print media, either the short edge or the long edge, feeds
through the printer first.
ESC&f#W [custom name]
Set Universal Custom Name
# = number of bytes in the custom name
Sets the user-specified custom name for the Universal paper size
being used.
ESC&l#O
Select Orientation
0
1
2
3
Portrait (Default)
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Specifies the position of the logical page with respect to the physical
page.
Note: This setting resets margins, the number of printable lines per
page, and the cursor position.
ESC&a#P
Print Direction
# = Degrees (0, 90, 180, 270)
Default = 0
Rotates the coordinate system counter-clockwise in 90° increments
with respect to the current orientation.
Note: Margins are not rotated or cleared.
ESC&c#T
Character Text Path Direction
0
-1
Horizontal Printing
Vertical Rotated Printing
Vertically rotates text for use in vertical writing, such as printing
Japanese text.
ESC&a#L
Set Left Margin
# = Column
Default = 0
Sets the left margin to the left edge of the designated column.
Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active
font and the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI).
ESC&a#M
Set Right Margin
# = Column
Sets the right margin to the right edge of the designated column.
Default = Logical Page Width
Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active
font and the HMI.
ESC9
Clear Horizontal Margins
Clears left and right margins.
Set Top Margin
ESC&l#E
# = number of lines
Default = 3 (1/2 inch)
Sets the number of lines between the top of the physical page and first
line of print. Line height is determined by the current Vertical Motion
Index (VMI) and/or line spacing value.
Note: Setting a top margin of 0 results in the first line of text falling
outside of the printable area.
ESC&l1T
Job Separation
This command is parsed and ignored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-38
Table 2-12: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
ESC&l#F
Function / Result
Set Text Length
# = number of lines
Sets the bottom margin length in lines, measured from the first line of
the page.
Default = 60 or 64 (Country specific)
Text Length equals Logical Page Length —1 inch (—1/2 inch for top and
—1/2 inch for bottom).
ESC&l#G
Set Output Bin
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Auto Select (uses the active bin)
Sets the exit path to direct paper to one of the output bins.
Standard Bin
Bin 1 or Rear Bin
Bin 1 or Rear Bin
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
10 Bin 8
11 Bin 9
12 Bin 10
ESC&l#L
Skip Perforation
0
1
Off
Perforation area includes the area from the bottom margin of the
current page to the top margin of the next page. When skipping
perforations, a line feed past the bottom margin ejects a page and
places the cursor at the top margin of the next page.
On (Default)
ESC&k#H
Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)
# = number of 1/120 inch increments
(Valid to 4 decimal places)
Sets the width of all characters for fixed-space fonts. Sets only the
width of the space for proportional spaced fonts.
ESC&l#C
Set Vertical Motion Index (VMI)
# = number of 1/48 inch increments
(Valid to 4 decimal places)
Default = 8
Sets Vertical Motion Index in 1/48 inch increments. The VMI
determines the vertical distance between lines.
Notes:
• For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the
Lines Per Page menu item. See your printer documentation for
more information.
• Use of this command alters any previous Set Line Spacing
command settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-39
Table 2-12: Page Control (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&l#D
Set Line Spacing (Alternative Method)
Specifies VMI in lines per inch.
Notes:
• For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the
Lines Per Page menu item. See your printer documentation for
more information.
1
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24
48
1 line/inch
2 lines/inch
3 lines/inch
4 lines/inch
6 lines/inch (Default)
8 lines/inch
12 lines/inch
16 lines/inch
24 lines/inch
48 lines/inch
• Unsupported values are ignored.
• Use of this command alters any earlier VMI setting.
E
SC&a#G
Duplex Page Side Selection
0
1
2
Next Side
Front Side
Back Side
Specifies which physical page side to print next when duplex printing.
Note: When the duplex option is not installed, this command causes a
conditional page eject.
ESC&l#P
# = number from 0 to 14
Set Page Length
Sets the logical page length in number of lines.
0 = default page length is used
(1 to 14 = new page length is set)
Notes:
• This command is sent at the beginning of a page in a print job and
prior to any printable data.
• When the command is sent, the current page is closed and printed.
• Unsupported values are ignored.
ESC&k#W
Text Scale Mode
5
6
Turn Text Scale Mode OFF
Turn Text Scale Mode ON
Allows 66 lines of text at six lines per inch to print on an effective page
length of 10 1/2 inches.
Notes:
• Unsupported values are ignored.
• The command is ignored when the printer is in landscape mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-40
Table 2-13: Alphanumeric ID
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Alphanumeric ID
ESC&n#W [operation] [string]
# = number of data bytes that make up the
operation and string
Selects the media type using a character string. The string ID is case
sensitive and may be up to 511 bytes long.
Operation
The string ID specifies the media type requested.
operation = 100 or 1 byte = 0x64 or 'd' ascii
For example:
Media Type
Alphanumeric String
Plain Paper
Bond
Transparency
Card Stock
Labels
Letterhead
Plain
Bond
Transparency
Card Stock
Labels
Letterhead
100
String
Media Select
string = See Alphanumeric String list at
right
Pre-printed
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Envelope
Color
Envelope
Custom Type 1
Custom Type 2
Custom Type 3
Custom Type 4
Custom Type 5
Custom Type 6
Custom Type 1 or User Type 1
Custom Type 2 or User Type 2
Custom Type 3 or User Type 3
Custom Type 4 or User Type 4
Custom Type 5 or User Type 5
Custom Type 6 or User Type 6
For example, the following shows the command and parameters used
to select bond paper: ESC&n5WdBond
To select letterhead paper: ESC&n11WdLetterhead
Table 2-14: Cursor Positioning
Command / Parameters
ESC&a#C
Function / Result
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns)
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
# = number of Columns1
Note: The column width is determined by the space character width of
the active font or the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI), if set.
ESC&a#H
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
# = number of Decipoints1
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC*p#X
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
# = number of PCL Units1
Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis.
Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
1 Parameter preceded by + or - sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a
sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-41
Table 2-14: Cursor Positioning (Continued)
Command / Parameters
ESC&a#R
Function / Result
Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows)
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
# = number of Rows1
Note: Row height is determined by either the Vertical Motion Index
(VMI) or the Set Line Spacing Command.
ESC&a#V
Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
# = number of Decipoints1
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC*p#Y
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis.
Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command.
Half Line-Feed
# = number of PCL Units1
ESC
=
Moves the cursor down 1/2 line (1/2 of the current VMI).
Set Line Termination
ESC&k#G
0
1
2
3
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF (Default)
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
CR=CR, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF
CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF
Controls how the printer responds to the Carriage Return (CR), Line
Feed (LF), and Form Feed (FF) control codes.
ESC&f#S
Push / Pop Cursor Position
0
1
Push
Pop
Sets up a cursor position stack for storing and recalling various cursor
positions. The stack can store up to 20 cursor positions.
1 Parameter preceded by + or - sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a
sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-42
parameters set following the best fit selection rules.
Table 2-15: Font Selection
Command / Parameters
ESC(# (primary)
Function / Result
Select Symbol Set
ESC)# (secondary)
The line-draw characters are contained in the symbol set ID 10U, PC-8.
The non-U.S. characters are contained in symbol set ID 12U, PC-850.
# = symbol set ID
Default = 10U (PC-8) or 12U
(PC-850), [Country specific]
ESC(s#P (primary)
Select Spacing
ESC)s#P (secondary)
Selects a font with proportional or fixed spacing.
0
1
Fixed (Default)
Proportional
ESC(s#H (primary)
ESC)s#H (secondary)
# = characters per inch
Default = 10
Select Pitch
Selects the number of characters per inch (cpi) for a fixed-space
bitmapped or monospaced scalable font. Valid to 2 decimal places.
Note: Pitch is not needed for proportional spaced fonts.
ESC(s#V (primary)
ESC)s#V (secondary)
# = height in points (.25 to 999.75)
Default = 12
Height (Select Point Size)
Sets the font height in points. Valid to 2 decimal places.
Note: Point size is not needed for monospaced fonts. For fonts larger
than 12 points, it may be necessary to change the line spacing.
ESC(s#S (primary)
Select Style
ESC)s#S (secondary)
Identifies the physical traits of a character and the composition of the font
symbols.
0
Upright (Default)
Italic
1
Note: You can only use this command to select fonts currently available
4
5
8
24
32
64
Condensed
Condensed Italic
Compressed
Expanded
Outline
in the printer. It cannot alter the appearance of the available fonts.
Inline
128 Shadowed
160 Outline Shadowed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-43
Table 2-15: Font Selection (Continued)
Command / Parameters
ESC(s#B (primary)
Function / Result
Select Stroke Weight
ESC)s#B (secondary)
Selects a font with a particular thickness.
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
Ultra Thin
Extra Thin
Thin
Extra Light
Light
Demi Light
Semi Light
Medium (Default)
Semi Bold
Demi Bold
Bold
Note: This command will not alter the stroke weight of an available font.
1
2
3
4
5
Extra Bold
Black
6
7
Extra Black
Ultra Black
ESC(s#T (primary)
Select Typeface
ESC)s#T (secondary)
Selects the best fit font design.
# Typeface identifier (0 - 65535)
To obtain the typeface values for downloaded fonts, print the font list from
the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your
printer documentation for more information.
Note: For a list of typeface numbers, see
On the printout, the typeface number is the last number on the font
selection command example line. The example line is below the name of
the font. In the following example, the typeface number is underlined:
RO Courier
<<ESC>>( <<s yms e t >><<ESC>>( s 0p<<pi t c h>>h0s 0b4099T
ESC(#X (primary)
Select Font by Font ID
ESC)#X (secondary)
# = Font ID (0 - 32767)
ESC(3@ (primary)
Selects the font by the identification number.
Select Default Font
ESC)3@ (secondary)
ESC&p#X[data]
Sets all font selection characteristics to the Default Font.
Transparent Print Data
# = number of data of bytes to print as text
ESC&d#D
Prints the next number of bytes as text.
Select Underline Type (Enable)
0,1 Fixed
Notes:
2
3
4
Fixed - double
Floating
Floating - double
• Fixed underline is drawn 5 pels below cursor position.
• Floating underline position is determined by all the positions of the
characters with descenders in the fonts that are to be underlined.
• Underline thickness is 1/100 inch.
ESC&d@
Underline - Disable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-44
Table 2-15: Font Selection (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&t#P
Text Parsing Method
0, 1
21
31
38
1008
1 byte characters
Communicates to the PCL parser whether character codes are
interpreted as 1-byte or 2-byte character codes.
1 or 2 byte characters
1 or 2 byte characters
1 or 2 byte characters
1, 2, or 3 byte characters (UTF-8)
ESC&k#S
Select Primary and Secondary Pitch
0
2
4
10.00 cpi
16.66 cpi
12.00 cpi
Selects the pitch for the primary and secondary font.
Table 2-16: User-Defined Symbol Set
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#R
Function / Result
Symbol Set ID Code
# = Symbol Set ID (0 - 32767)
Default = 0
Sets the symbol set identification for the symbol set downloaded.
ESC(f#W[data]
Define Symbol Set
# = number of data bytes
ESC*c#S
Contains the data for the user-defined symbol sets.
Symbol Set Control
0
1
2
4
5
Delete all (temporary and permanent)
Delete all temporary
Delete current (ID)
Make current temporary
Make current permanent
Manages user-defined symbol sets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-45
Table 2-17: Font Creation
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#D
Function / Result
Set Font ID
# = Font ID # (0 - 32767)
Default = 0
Sets the identification number for the font being downloaded.
ESC)s#W[data]
Load Font Header
# = number of data bytes
Downloads soft font header information.
Note: Set Font ID before using this command.
Caution: Font Control
ESC*c#F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Delete all (temporary and permanent) Manages soft fonts.
Delete all temporary
Delete previous font ID
Delete previous specified character
Make previous font ID temporary
Make previous font ID permanent
Copy current font
ESC*c#E
Set Character Code
# = Code Point (0 - 65536)
Default = 0
Sets the decimal code point associated with the next character
downloaded or deleted.
ESC(s#W[data]
Load Character
# = number of data bytes
Downloads character descriptor and data to the current character
code.
Table 2-18: Macros
Command / Parameters
ESC&f#Y
Function / Result
Set Macro ID
# = Macro ID (0 - 32767)
Default = 0
Sets the ID for the macro you have created on flash or disk.
ESC&f#X
Macro Control
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Start definition
End definition
Execute macro (previous macro ID)
Call macro (previous macro ID)
Enable overlay (previous macro ID)
Disable overlay
Manages use of macros.
Notes:
• GL/2 commands are supported inside macros.
• Only call and execute macro commands are allowed within a macro.
• A macro may call or execute another macro. This is called nesting.
A maximum of two nesting levels are allowed, for a total of three
levels.
Delete all macros
Delete all temporary macros
Delete current macro ID
Make last ID temporary
10 Make last ID permanent
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-46
Table 2-19: Print Model
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#G
Function / Result
Area Fill ID
Gray Scale Fills
Selects pattern used to fill a rectangular area.
0
1-2
White (default)
2% gray
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
3-10
11-20
21-35
36-55
56-80
81-99
100
10% gray
15% gray
30% gray
45% gray
70% gray
90% gray
100% gray (Black)
Cross-Hatch Fills
1
2
3
4
5
6
Horizontal line
Vertical line
Diagonal line
Diagonal line
Square grid
Diagonal grid
User-Defined Patterns
# = User-Defined Pattern ID
ESC*v#N
Source Transparency Mode
0
1
Transparent (Default)
Opaque
Affects copying of white pixels from the source onto the destination
image.
ESC*v#O
Pattern Transparency Mode
0
1
Transparent (Default)
Opaque
Affects copying of white pixels from the pattern onto the destination
image.
ESC*l#O
Logical Operation
# = logical operation, value (0 to 255)
Default = 252
Defines boolean operations to be performed on data already printed
and data about to be printed.
ESC*l#R
Pixel Placement
0
1
Grid Intersection (Default)
Grid Centered
Determines how pixels are placed for a rectangular area fill and GL/2
objects.
Pixel Placement does not affect text or raster images.
Select Current Pattern
ESC*v#T
0
1
2
3
4
9
Solid Black (Default)
Solid White
Gray Shading Pattern
Cross-Hatch Pattern
User Defined Pattern
True gray Level Fill
Selects pattern used when printing text and raster images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-47
Table 2-20: User-Defined Pattern
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#W[data]
Function / Result
User-Defined Pattern
# = number of data bytes
ESC*p#R
Downloads binary pattern data.
Set Pattern Reference Point
0
1
Rotate with print (Default)
Fixed
Sets the pattern reference point to the current cursor position for user-
defined patterns.
Note: Default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of the
logical page.
ESC*c#Q
0
Caution: Pattern Control
Delete all patterns (temporary and
permanent)
Delete all temporary patterns
Delete pattern (last ID specified)
Make pattern of last ID # temporary
Make pattern of last ID # permanent
Manages the use of user-defined patterns.
Note: Use the Area Fill ID command (ESC*c#G) to set the ID.
1
2
4
5
Table 2-21: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#H
Function / Result
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767)
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC*c#A
Specifies the rectangle width in decipoints.
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767)
Default = 0
Specifies the rectangle width in PCL units.
Note: The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit-of-Measure command.
Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
ESC*c#V
# = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767)
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places
ESC*c#B
Specifies the rectangle height in decipoints.
Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
# = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767)
Default = 0
Specifies the rectangle height in PCL units.
Note: The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit-of-Measure command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-48
Table 2-21: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#G
Function / Result
Area Fill ID
Gray Scale Fills
Selects the pattern used to fill the rectangular area.
0
White (default)
Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID.
1-2
2% Gray
3-10
11-20
21-35
36-55
56-80
81-99
100
10% Gray
15% Gray
30% Gray
45% Gray
70% Gray
90% Gray
100% Gray (Black)
Cross-Hatch Fills
1
2
3
4
5
6
Horizontal Line
Vertical Line
Diagonal Line
Diagonal Line
Square Grid
Diagonal Grid
User-Defined Patterns
# = User-Defined Pattern ID
ESC*c#P
Fill Rectangular Area
0
1
2
3
Black Fill (Default)
White Fill
Gray Fill
Pre-Defined Cross-Hatch
Pattern Fill
Fills a rectangular area defined by Horizontal and Vertical Rectangle
Sizes with the selected pattern.
4
5
9
User-Defined Pattern
Current Pattern Fill
True gray Level Fill
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-49
Table 2-22: Raster Graphics
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Raster Resolution
ESC*t#R
75
75 dpi
Note: 200 dpi is only supported when the printer is operating in
100
150
200
300
600
1200
100 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
600 dpi or 1200 dpi mode.
ESC*r#F
Raster Graphics Presentation
0
3
Rotate with print
Fixed (Default)
Sets the Raster Image Orientation in relation to the logical page.
ESC*r#S
Raster Width (Source)
# = Number of Input Pixels
ESC*r#T
# = Number of Raster Lines
ESC*r#A
Sets the width of the clip window for raster graphics.
Raster Height (Source)
Sets the height of the clip window for raster graphics.
Start Raster Graphics
0
1
2
Left Graphics Margin at 0 (Default)
Current Cursor Position
At logical left page limit with scaling
On
Sets the left margin for raster graphics.
3
At current cursor position with
scaling On
ESC*b#V[data]
Transfer Raster Data by Plane
# = Number of Data Bytes
This command is used when the raster data is encoded by plane as
specified by the Simple Color command or the Configure Image
Data command. The command sends each plane in the row except
the last.
ESC*b#Y
# = Number of Raster Lines
Y Offset
Moves the cursor position down by the specified number of raster
lines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-50
Table 2-22: Raster Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Set Raster Compression Mode
ESC*b#M
0
1
2
Uncoded (Default)
Identifies the compression mode the host uses to transfer RIG data.
For instance, this command can be run-length encoding or TIFF
encoding.
Run-Length Encoded
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)
byte
3
5
9
Delta Row
Adaptive Compression
Replacement Delta Row
Zlib
999
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
Group 4
Group 3 one dimensional
Group 3 two dimensional K=2
Group 3 two dimensional K=4
TIFF word (16 bit)
TIFF double-word (32 bit)
Adaptive compression (includes
TIFF word and TIFF double-word)
ESC*b#W[data]
# = Number of Data Bytes
Transfer Raster Data by Row/Block
Transfers RIG data.
Note: After each command, the cursor position is moved to the
beginning of the next raster row.
ESC*rB
End Raster Graphics (Version B)
Signals the end of the raster graphics transfer. If a Raster Height is
specified, the cursor is moved to the first raster row past the Raster
Height.
ESC*rC
End Raster Graphics (Version C)
Same as Version B, but:
• Resets the compression mode to uncoded.
• Setsthe left graphics margin to 0.
ESC*t#H
Raster Width (Destination)
Sets the width of the destination raster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-51
Table 2-22: Raster Graphics (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*t#V
Raster Height (Destination)
Sets the height of the destination raster.
Set Raster Configuration
ESC*g#W[data]
Sets the configuration of the destination raster.
# - 8 (K-only) or 26 (KCMY)
Data
Byte 0 - 0x02 (constant)
Byte 1 - number of colors
0x01 - K only
0x04 - CMYK
Byte 2,3 - X res for K plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 4,5 - Y res for K plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 6,7 - K plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 8,9 - X res for C plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 10,11 - Y res for C plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 12,13 - C plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 14,15 - X res for M plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 16,17 - Y res for M plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 18,19 - M plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Byte 20,21 - X res for Y plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 22,23 - Y res for Y plane
0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600)
Byte 24,25 - Y plane intensity levels
0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-52
Table 2-23: Color Extensions
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&b#M
Monochrome Print Mode
0
Print in mixed render algorithm
Changes each color value to its gray scale equivalent.
mode
1
ESC&p#C
0
Print using gray scale equivalent
Palette Control
Delete all palettes except those Provides palette management.
in stack (active palette is
deleted)
1
2
6
Delete all palettes in stack
(active palette not affected)
Delete palette specified by
Palette Control ID
Copy active palette to ID
specified by Palette Control ID
ESC&p#I
Palette Control ID
0 to 32767
ESC&p#S
0 to 32767
Palette ID number
Palette ID number
Indicates the ID number used by the Palette Control command.
Select Palette
Selects a new active palette by indicating the ID number.
Color Lookup Tables
ESC*l#W[data]
0
Resets or initializes the color
lookup tables for each primary
color to the unity curve
Enables the color lookup tables and specifies the table to use.
770, Data
Data for color lookup table
ESC*m#W[data]
Download Dither Matrix
7 to 32767, Data
Data size and data of
byte-aligned binary data
that specifies a matrix or
matrices for the primary
colors
Downloads a device dependent user-defined dither matrix.
ESC*o#W[data]
1 to 32767, Data
Driver Configuration Command
Specifies lightness,
saturation, and image
scaling
Indicates the lightness, saturation, and scaling algorithm to be
applied to a job.
ESC*p#P
Push/Pop Palette
0
1
Push (Save) Palette
Pop (Restore) Palette
Saves (push) the current palette and then restores (pop) it from the
palette stack.
ESC*r#U
Simple Color
-4
-3
1
4 planes, device CMYK palette
3 planes, device CMY palette
Single plane, K (black) palette
3 planes, device RGB palette
Creates a fixed-size palette. The color specification of the palette
cannot be modified.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-53
Table 2-23: Color Extensions (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
Gamma Correction
ESC*t#I
0
Gamma Correction Off
Gamma Number
Improves the perceptual correctness of color data sent from the
monitor to any other non-linear device by adjusting the brightness
and darkness.
0.0 to 4.0
ESC*t#J
Render Algorithm
Selects the algorithm used for dithering images and fills.
Color Component One
ESC*v#A
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Indicates the first primary color specified by the Assign Color Index
command.
ESC*v#B
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Color Component Two
Indicates the second primary color specified by the Assign Color
Index command.
ESC*v#C
-32767.0 to 32767.0
Color Component Three
Indicates the third primary color specified by the Assign Color Index
command.
ESC*v#I
Assign Color Index
# = Palette Index
0 to 2 — 1 = Palette Index
Designates the three current color components to the specified
palette index number. n represents the number of bits per index.
n
ESC*v#S
Foreground Color
# = Palette Index
0 to 2 — 1 = Palette Index
Sets the foreground color to the specified index in the current
palette. n represents the current palette size.
n
ESC*v#W[data]
Configure Image Data
Creates programmable palettes.
Viewing Illuminant
8, Data
ESC*i#W[data]
Designates the relative white point used in determining a viewing
illuminant condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-54
Table 2-24: Status Readback
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC*s#T
Set Status Readback Location Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
Invalid location (Default)
Use currently selected location
All locations
Internal (resident)
Downloaded entity
Cartridge
Sets the status location type to the specified value.
The 5 value for Cartridge may be specified, but since your printer
does not support font cards or cartridges, the command is ignored.
The 7 value for User-installable flash is only valid when flash
memory is installed.
7
200
User-installable flash
Disk
The 200 value is only valid when a hard disk is installed.
ESC*s#U
Set Status Readback Location Unit
0
1
All
Sets the status location unit to the specified value.
If download, temporary; otherwise,
highest priority
If download, permanent; otherwise,
next higher priority
The location unit is used along with the location type to identify a
location for the Inquire Status Readback Entity command.
2
Note: The unit value is interpreted differently, depending on the
location type specified.
ESC*s#I
Inquire Status Readback Entity
0
1
2
3
Font
Macro
Returns the requested information set by Set Status Readback
Location Type and Set Status Readback Location Unit.
User-defined pattern
Symbol set (for unbound scalable
fonts)
4
Font extended
ESC*s1M
Free Space
Returns the total available memory and the largest available block
of memory.
ESC&r#F
Flush All Pages
0
1
Flush all complete pages
Flush all pages
Holds print jobs in the print buffer until the current job finishes
printing.
ESC*s#X
Echo
-32767 to 32767
Default = 0
Returns # back to host computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-55
Table 2-25: Picture Frame
Command / Parameters
ESC*c#X
Function / Result
Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints)
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC*c#Y
Specifies the horizontal dimension of the picture frame used when
printing a GL/2 plot.
Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints)
# of Decipoints: 0 to 32767
(1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch)
ESC*c0T
Specifies the vertical dimension of the picture frame used when
printing a GL/2 plot.
Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
0
Set Anchor Point to Cursor Position
Sets the position of the picture frame anchor point to the cursor
position. The picture frame anchor point defines the location of the
upper left corner of the picture frame.
ESC*c#K
GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size
Size in inches: 0 to 32767
Specifies the horizontal scaling factor used when importing an
image into the picture frame.
ESC*c#L
Size in inches: 0 to 32767
GL/2 Vertical Plot Size
Specifies the vertical scaling factor used when importing an image
into the picture frame.
ESC%#B
Enter GL/2 Language
0
1
Use Previous GL/2 Pen Position
Use Current PCL Cursor Position
Exits PCL emulation and uses GL/2 commands to print.
ESC%#A
Enter PCL Emulation
0
1
Use Previous PCL Cursor Position
Use Current GL/2 Pen Position
Exits GL/2 mode and uses PCL emulation commands to print.
Table 2-26: Miscellaneous Commands
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESC&s#C
End-Of-Line Text Wrap
0
1
Enable
Disable (Default)
Enabling End-Of-Line Text Wrap moves portions of lines that extend
into the unprintable area to the next line. Disabling drops the portion
extending into the unprintable area.
ESCY
Display Functions On
Prints all control codes and escape sequences rather than executing
them.
Notes:
• To prevent characters from falling outside the right margin (and not
printing), enable End-Of-Line Text Wrap (ESC&s0C).
• To see the control characters and other blank codepoints in symbol
set Roman8 (8U), set the symbol set to PC-8 (10U).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-56
Table 2-26: Miscellaneous Commands (Continued)
Command / Parameters
Function / Result
ESCZ
Display Functions Off
Turns off Display Functions; resumes normal command processing.
Print Test Page
ESCz
Causes a test page to print.
ESC*o#M(b)
Print Quality
-1
0
1
Ink Saver
Normal
Best
Selects the print quality setting for the page.
ESC&l#M(b)
Paper Type
0
1
Plain Paper
Bond
Selects the paper type setting for the page.
2
3
4
Coated Paper
Glossy Paper
Transparency
Photo Paper
Card Stock
Labels
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Iron On
GL/2 Commands
Note: GL/2 is not a stand-alone plotter emulation. It can only be entered from within
PCL emulation and cannot be used with software without a unique printer
driver written explicitly for GL/2.
The following tables list the GL/2 commands by group. To determine which GL/2
Table 2-27: Configuration Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
Comment
CO "text"
DF;
Default Values
Initialize
IN (n);
IP (X , Y (, X , Y ));
Input P1 and P2
P1
P1
P2
P2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-57
Table 2-27: Configuration Group (Continued)
Command / Parameter
IR (X , Y (, X , Y ));
Command Name
Input Relative P1 and P2
Input Window
P1
P1
P2
P2
IW (X , Y , X , Y );
1
1
2
2
MC (mode(, opcode));
PP (mode);
Logical Operation
Pixel Placement
Rotate Coordinate System
Scale
RO (angle);
SC (X
X
, Y , Y
(, type(, left, bottom)));
min, max
min
max
Table 2-28: Vector Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
Arc Absolute
AA X
AR X
, Y
, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
center center
, Y
Arc Relative
center center
AT X
Y
, X , Y (, chord_angle);
Absolute Arc Three Point
Bezier Relative
Bezier Absolute
Circle
inter, inter end end
BR X , Y , X , Y , X , Y (,...);
1
1
2
2
3
3
BZ X , Y , X , Y , X , Y (,...);
1
1
2
2
3
3
CI radius(, chord_angle);
PA (X, Y(,...));
Plot Absolute
PD (X, Y(,...));
Pen Down
PE (flag(value) | coordinates (...));
PR (X, Y(,...));
Polyline Encoded
Plot Relative
PU (X, Y(,...));
Pen Up
RT X
, Y
, X
, Y
(, chord_angle);
Arc Relative Three Point
Pen Width Units
incr inter incr inter incr end incr end
WU (type);
Table 2-29: Polygon Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
EA X, Y;
EP;
Edge Rectangle Absolute
Edge Polygon
ER X, Y;
Edge Rectangle Relative
Edge Wedge
EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
FP (0);
Fill Polygon, Odd/Even
FP 1;
Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding
Polygon Mode
PM (mode);
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-58
Table 2-29: Polygon Group (Continued)
Command / Parameter
Command Name
RA X, Y;
Fill Rectangle Absolute
Fill Rectangle Relative
Fill Wedge
RR X, Y;
WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle);
Table 2-30: Character Group
Command / Parameter
AD (kind, value(,...));
CF (mode(, pen));
CP (spaces, lines);
DI (run, rise);
Command Name
Define Alternate Font
Character Fill
Character Plot
Absolute Direction
Relative Direction
Define Label Terminator
Define Variable Text Path
Extra Space
DR (run, rise);
DT (label_terminator(, mode));
DV (path(, line));
ES (width(, height));
FI font_ID;
Primary Font
FN font_ID;
Secondary Font
Label
LB char...char label_terminator;
LM (mode,[row number])
LO (position);
Label Mode
Label Origin
LO 21;
Uses PCL Label Origin
Select Alternate Font
SA;
SB (mode);
Scalable or Bitmapped Fonts
Define Standard Font
Absolute Character Size
Character Slant
SD (kind, value(,...));
SI (width, height);
SL (tangent);
SR (width, height);
SS;
Relative Character Size
Select Standard Font
Transparent Data
TD (mode);
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-59
Table 2-31: Line and Fill Attributes Group
Command / Parameter
Command Name
AC (X, Y);
Anchor Corner
Color Range
CR (red
, red
, green
, green
,
white ref
black ref
white ref
black ref
blue
, blue
);
black ref
white ref
FT (fill_type(, option1(, option2));
Fill Type
FT22, (PCL User-Defined Pattern ID);
FT 9, level;
Fill Type
Fill Type
LA (kind, value(,...));.
Line Attributes
Line Type
LT (pattern_number(, pattern_length(, mode)));
NP (number);
Number of Pens
Pen Color
PC (pen (, red, green, blue));
PW (width(, pen));
Pen Width
RF (index(, width, height(, pen, ...)));
SM (character);
Define Raster Fill
Symbol Mode
Select Pen
SP (pen);
SV (screen_type(, option1(, option2)));
SV (9, level,)
Screened Vectors
Screened Vectors
Threshold Matrix
Transparency Mode
User Defined Line
Pen Width Units
TM (width, height(, number...));
TR (mode);
UL (index(, gap,...gap));
WU (type);
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-60
Raster Image Graphics
These commands utilize the raster area. Before sending data, set the presentation
mode, the resolution, the compression mode, the raster height and width, and start
raster graphics. These parameters are in effect until you overwrite them with a
different command or there is a printer reset.
To ensure that the printed image appears in the expected area, set width and height
parameters.
Raster Compression Mode
The Raster Compression Mode command determines how raster data is coded. It
affects the amount of code required to create an image, and the efficiency of image
printing.
Syntax:
ESC*b#M
Parameters:
0
Uncoded (default)
1
Run-Length Encoded
2
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) Byte
Delta Row
3
5
Adaptive Compression
Replacement Delta Row
Zlib
9
999
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
Group 4
Group 3 one dimensional
Group 3 two dimensional K=2
Group 3 two dimensional K=4
TIFF word (16 bit)
TIFF double-word (32 bit)
Adaptive Compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-61
Descriptions and examples of the different parameters appear on the following pages.
Each example draws the same square outline 64 bits (8 bytes) wide by 64 scan lines
long.
Uncoded Data
Uncoded Data is not compressed. Only those bytes needed to form the image are
sent. Each bit represents a single dot. In the first byte, bit 7 corresponds to the first dot
in the raster row, bit 5 to the third dot, and so forth.
Example:
ESC*p300x300Y
|Move the cursor to 1" x 1" (1 in. from top margin
and 1 in. from left edge of logical page)
|Set resolution to 100 dots per inch
|Rotate image to match current orientation
|Set compression mode to Uncoded
ESC*t 100R
ESC*r 0F
ESC*b0M
ESC*r 1A
|Start raster graphics at current position
ESC*b8W ' FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF' x |Raster data uncompressed
ESC*b8W ' 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 01' x
ESC*b8W ' 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 01' x
. . .
|Repeat to provide 64 total scan lines
ESC*b8W ' 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 01' x
ESC*b8W ' FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF' x
ESC*r B
|End graphics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-62
Run-Length Encoded Data
Run-Length Encoded Data is interpreted in pairs of bytes. The first byte:
• Acts as a counter, or control byte.
• Indicates how many times to repeat the data in the second byte.
• Can be from 0 (no repetition) to 255.
• The second byte is the data byte.
Example:
ESC*p300x600Y
ESC*b1M
ESC*r 1A
ESC*b2W ' 07FF' x
ESC*b6W ' 0080 0500 0001' x
ESC*b6W ' 0080 0500 0001' x
. . .
|Move cursor to 1" x 2"
|Set compression to Run-Length
|Start raster graphics at current position
|Run-Length: 8x'FF'x
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|. . .
ESC*b6W ' 0080 0500 0001' x
ESC*b2W ' 07FF' x
ESC*r B
|1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x
|8x'FF'x
|End graphics
Tagged Image File Format
TIFF “Packbits” contain a control byte (a signed number) that indicates whether the
raster data bytes are to be repeated (up to 127 times) or printed as encoded data.
• For control values of 0 through 127, the next (Control+1) byte(s) is uncoded.
• For control values of -1 through -127 ('FF'x - '81'x), the next byte is repeated
(Abs(Control)+1) times.
Example:
ESC*p300x900Y
ESC*b2M
ESC*r 1A
ESC*b2W ' F9FF' x
ESC*b6W ' 0080 FB00 0001' x
ESC*b9W ' 078000000000000001' x
. . .
|Move cursor to 1" x 3"
|Set compression to TIFF
|Start Raster Graphics at current position
| TIFF: 8x'FF'x
|1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x or
|8: '8000000000000001'x
|. . .
ESC*b6W ' 0080 FB00 0001' x
ESC*b2W ' F9FF' x
ESC*r B
|1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x
|8x'FF'x
|End graphics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-63
Delta Row
Delta Row is a compression mode that identifies and transmits only those bytes
different from the ones in a preceding row. The control byte consists of two parts:
• High 3 bits: Number of bytes to replace +1 (1 to 8).
• Low 5 bits: Offset from last unmodified byte (0-30); if the offset is 31, the next
byte(s) is added to the offset until the next byte is not 255.
Example:
ESC*p300x1200Y
ESC*b3M
ESC*r 1A
|Move cursor to 1" x 4"
|Set compression to Delta Row
|Start raster graphics at current position
|Num Offset
|'111 00000'b=8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
|8 at 0: '8000000000000001'x
|No bytes change
ESC*b9W ' E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF' x
ESC*b9W ' E08000000000000001' x
ESC*b0W
. . .
ESC*b0W
|No bytes change
ESC*b9W ' E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF' x
ESC*r B
|8 at 0: '8FFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x
|End graphics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-64
Adaptive Compression
Adaptive compression allows the combined use of compression methods 0 through 3
(Uncoded, Run-Length Encoded, TIFF, and Delta Row). It also allows the printing of
empty rows (all zeros) or duplicate rows.
• The Transfer Raster Data command size includes all rows (scan lines).
• Scan Mode and SizeH,L are three-byte primary control strings: CountH and
CountL.
Table 2-32: Adaptive Compression Control Strings
Scan Mode
CountH,CountL
Data sizeH,L
Data sizeH,L
Data sizeH,L
Data
0
1
2
Uncoded raster scan data
Size of Run-length encoded data (high,low)
Size of Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) data
(high,low)
3
4
Data SizeH,L
Size of Delta Row data (high,low)
None
NumberH,L of empty
rows
5
NumberH,L of duplicate
rows
None
254
255
Data SizeH,L
Data SizeH,L
TIFF word
TIFF double-word
Example:
ESC*p300x1500Y
ESC*b5M
ESC*b29W
|Move cursor to 1" x 5"
|Set the compression to Adaptive Compression
|Raster Data: 29 bytes follow
' 03 0009' x ' E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF' x | Delta Row: 8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh'x
' 01 0006' x ' 0080 FB00 0001' x
' 05 0035' x
| Run Length: 1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1:'01'x
| Duplicate rows: 61 times
| TIFF: 8x'FF'x
' 02 0002' x ' F9FF ' x
ESC*r B
|End graphics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-65
Zlib
Zlib is a generic compression method. It refers to a standard for compression as well
as the library that implements the standard.
The zlib compression method uses the deflate algorithm. This same algorithm is used
by more widely known compression utilities such as PKZIP and GZIP.
Compressed data is a series of variably-sized blocks. An encoder determines how to
break the data into blocks and finds the best compression method to use for each
block.
An encoder works based on the following principles. The encoder creates a dictionary
containing different characters in a set of data. Short strings of bits represent more
commonly occurring characters, and long strings of bits represent less frequently
used characters. A probability tree determines which characters are frequently used.
Repeated patterns in a string of characters are identified and stored, so the string
doesn’t have to be stored multiple times.
A three-bit zlib header is added to the beginning of a block to describe the type of
compression used and indicates whether the block is a final block. Other information
in the header includes checksums, compression algorithm used, and the level of
compression. In compression all checksums are set to zero and in decompression the
checksums are ignored.
The memory required for zlib compression and decompression is independent of the
size of the data to be compressed or decompressed.
The number 999 does not conflict with other compression types, so it is used to
Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression
Since Group 4 images do not use line endings, the width of the image must be
specified using the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S).
The compressed image data is sent to the printer using the Transfer Raster Data
command (ESC*b#W). The maximum number of bytes that can be sent using the
Transfer Raster Data command is 32K bytes. Images larger than 32K bytes must be
broken up and sent using multiple commands. It does not matter where the image is
broken, or how many Transfer Raster Data commands are used. Once the image is
started (with a Transfer Raster Data command), no other commands are allowed until
the entire image has been sent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-66
The following example prints a Group 4 image file that is 256 bits wide and 9,645 bytes
long:
ESC*b1002M
ESC*r 256S
ESC*r 1A
ESC*b9645W
. . . [Gr oup 4 i ma ge da t a ]. . .
ESC*r B
|Set Raster Compression to Group 4
|Define width of image in input bits
|Start Raster Graphics at current position
|9,645 bytes of a Group 4 image
|End Raster Graphics
All lines of data must be the same length. If they are not, zeroes (0) must be added to
attain the same length.
Note: If the uncompressed image extends beyond the logical page dimensions or
beyond the raster width specified in the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S), the
image is clipped at print time.
Additional Compression Modes
When the compression mode is 1008 (Lexmark Adaptive), TIFF word and double-
word can be printed using compression scan modes 254 and 255 respectively. This
compression method sends a raster image as a block of raster data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL
2-67
Macros
When creating a macro, first assign it an ID number. If this number is identical to an
existing macro ID in RAM, the old macro is deleted when you specify the Macro
Control Start Definition. Next, start the macro definition, send the contents of the
macro, and stop the macro definition.
Note: Although a macro may be called or executed from within another macro
(nesting), a macro cannot be defined within another macro definition. Each
macro must be defined separately.
Example:
This example creates a macro to print the Wigit Corp. logo, then calls the logo macro
in the body of a letter.
ESC&f 1Y
ESC&f 0X
ESC&a +72H
ESC( 8U
|Set the macro ID to 1
|Start the macro definition
|Relative move right 1/10 inch (+72/720th)
|Select Roman-8 symbol set
|Select CG Times 18 point bold
|Print W
|Relative move left 0.03 inch
|Select (CG Times) 12 point (bold) italic
|Print igit
ESC( s 1p18v0s 3b4101T
W
ESC&a - 21. 6H
ESC( s 12v1S
i gi t
ESC&a +72H
ESC( s 18v0S
C
|Relative move right 1/10 inch
|Select 18 point and turn off italic
|Print C
ESC( s 12v1S
|Select 12 point italic
or p.
|Print orp.
ESC&a +72H
ESC&f 1X
ESC&f 10X
. . .
|Relative move right 1/10 inch
|End of macro definition
|Make Macro ID 1 permanent
. . .
Fr om:
ESC&f 1y3X
|Print the header From:
|Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro
|Print the letter
. . .
Tha nk you f or . . .
ESC&f 1y3X
. . .
|Print the closing
|Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-1
CHAPTER 3: Printer Job Language
Your printer supports complete Printer Job Language (PJL) commands, including
certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript
emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS).
PJL Command Notation
The syntax for each supported PJL command is listed in this chapter. The following
character codes are used throughout the chapter to illustrate the syntax of each PJL
command.
Table 3-1: PJL Command Notation
Character
Code
<ESC>
<LF>
Description
Hex Code
0x1B
Decimal Code
Escape Character
Line Feed Character
Carriage Return Character
Form Feed Character
Horizontal Tab
27
10
13
12
9
0x0A
<CR>
<FF>
0x0D
0x0C
<HT>
<UEL>
0x09
Universal Exit Language
0x1B 25 2D 31
32 33 34 35 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-2
Notes:
• Parameters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and not required
for command execution.
• The PJL interpreter requires uppercase for the @PJ L prefix for all PJL com-
mands except the Universal Exit Language (UEL) command. The rest of
the PJL command is not case sensitive. The UEL command is case sensi-
tive.
• All PJL commands except UEL must be terminated with a line feed char-
acter (<LF>).
Kernel Commands
UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command
The Universal Exit Language (UEL) command terminates the current printer language
and allows dynamic switching into PJL.
Syntax:
<ESC>%- 12345X
Notes:
• If the printer receives this command while in PCL emulation, it performs a
Printer Language Reset (ESCE) before exiting PCL emulation.
• If the printer receives this command while in PostScript emulation, it performs
an End-of-Job (EOJ) command before exiting PostScript emulation (Ctrl-D).
The PJL commands must immediately follow the UEL command (that is, the X in the
UEL syntax must be immediately followed by the @PJ L of the next PJL command).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-3
ENTER LANGUAGE Command
This command causes the printer to enter the specified language, such as
PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, or PPDS.
Syntax:
@PJ L ENTER LANGUAGE = l a ngua ge [ <CR>] <LF>
Notes:
• l a ngua ge is PCL, PCL3, PCLXL, Pos t Sc r i pt , or PPDS.
• You can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. (@PJ L must be uppercase;
all others can be mixed or lowercase.)
Example:
@PJ L ENTER LANGUAGE = Pos t Sc r i pt [ <CR>] <LF>
enters PostScript emulation.
COMMENT Command
This command lets you add descriptive comments to your PJL job.
Syntax:
@PJ L COMMENT wor ds [ <CR>] <LF>
Notes:
• When the printer receives this command, it is ignored.
• The wor ds parameter can be any combination of printable characters,
spaces, and horizontal tabs.
• The COMMENT command is terminated by the line feed character (<LF>).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-4
Job Separation Commands
Your printer supports the PJL JOB and EOJ commands. When the printer receives a
JOB command, the print timeout is multiplied by 10; when the printer receives a PJL
EOJ command, the print timeout is reset to the user default. The Waiting message
appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional until
an EOJ command is received or until the print timeout expires.
Your printer also supports the PASSWORD parameter for the PJL JOB command.
JOB Command
The host computer can use the JOB command to separate print data into various parts
or jobs. Specifically, the JOB command signifies to the printer the start of a print job.
Use the EOJ command to signify the end of a job. In addition, use the JOB/EOJ pair
to accomplish the following:
• Provide a job name (the name displays on the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional).
• Indicate which pages of the job should be printed.
• Monitor the job status as it prints.
Syntax:
@PJ L J OB [ NAME = " j ob na me " ] [ START = f i r s t pa ge ]
[ END = l a s t pa ge ] [ PASSWORD = numbe r ] [ <CR>] <LF>
Notes:
• The JOB command should only be used in conjunction with the EOJ
command.
• After receiving a JOB command, the printer does not process a UEL
command as a PJL job boundary until it receives the corresponding EOJ.
Instead, UELs occurring within a JOB/EOJ pair are processed as printer
language resets (for example, PCL ESCE).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-5
Parameters:
NAME = " j ob na me"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job.
The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces or horizontal
tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The j ob na me must be
enclosed in double quotes, as indicated by the command syntax.
START = f i r s t pa ge
Use the START parameter in conjunction with the END parameter to skip the
printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards pages of a job
until the page specified by this parameter is reached. The f i r s t pa ge range is
from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the START parameter causes the printer
to start printing with page 1 of the job.
END = l a s t pa ge
Use the END parameter in conjunction with the START parameter to skip the
printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards all pages of a job
after the l a s t pa ge has been printed. The specification of l a s t pa ge is relative
to page 1 of the print job and its range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of
the END parameter causes the printer to print all pages to the end of the job.
PASSWORD = numbe r
A system administrator can control which jobs, and therefore which users, are
allowed to modify the printer default or NVRAM variables by declaring a PJL
password. With a PJL password declared, the PASSWORD parameter with the
correct PASSWORD number must be specified in order to modify the default
printer environment.
A PJL JOB command with the correct PASSWORD must be issued before any
PJL command can modify an NVRAM setting. The PJL EOJ command
terminates the job and disables any further modification of NVRAM. If a PJL
password is declared and the wrong PASSWORD number is specified on the
PJL JOB command, the printer will delay one half of a second before processing
the next command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-6
For detailed information on PJL password protection, see “File and Device
Note: Setting a default PJL password disables the use of PJL DEFAULT and
INITIALIZE commands. (See “DEFAULT Command” on page 3-8 and
EOJ Command
The EOJ command signifies the end of a print job.
Syntax:
@PJ L EOJ [ NAME = " j ob na me " ] [ <CR>] <LF>
Note:
Only use the EOJ command in conjunction with the JOB command.
Parameter:
NAME = " j ob na me"
Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job.
The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces, or horizontal
tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The NAME string may
be different from the NAME string specified in the JOB command. The j ob na me
must be enclosed in double quotes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-7
Environment Commands and Variables
This section describes the printer environment variables and the PJL commands used
to modify or query the variables.
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Table 3-2: Environment Variable Categories
Beginning
Categories
on Page ...
Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
Common Variables for PCL emulation
Printer Unique Variables for PCL emulation
Common Variables for PostScript emulation
Printer Unique Variables for PostScript emulation
Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
The following commands modify the environment variables, and are described in this
section:
• DEFAULT
• SET
• INITIALIZE
• RESET
The following commands query the environment variables, and are described in
• INQUIRE
• DINQUIRE
• INFO
• ECHO
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-8
DEFAULT Command
This command modifies the default setting for the specified environment variable and
stores the setting in the printer NVRAM. The new setting is activated with the
occurrence of the next PJL reset condition.
Syntax:
@PJ L DEFAULT [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e =va l ue [ <CR>] <LF>
[ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
• A [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter is not required for variables listed in
• LPARM: PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
• LPARM: POSTSCRI PT is used for variables specific to PostScript emulation. (See
• LRESOURCE: "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " is required for LRESOURCE
variables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The f i l e na me is case sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for
PCL macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See
Password Commands” on page 3-87 for a complete list of
the supported file types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-9
va r i a bl e =va l ue
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12.
Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked
Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET
command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT
command. They are marked Set Only.
SET Command
This command modifies the current setting for the specified environment variable. The
new setting is active immediately, and remains active until the next occurrence of a
PJL reset condition.
Use the SET command to modify any currently defined environment variable that
cannot be set using the desired printer language. For example, use the PJL SET
command to set Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) or Page Protect,
which cannot be set within a printer language such as PCL emulation.
Syntax:
@PJ L SET [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e =va l ue [ <CR>] <LF>
where
[ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
• A [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] is not required for variables listed in the tables
• LPARM: PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
• LPARM: POSTSCRI PT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-10
• LRESOURCE: "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " is required for LRESOURCE
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The f i l e na me is case sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for
PCL macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the
supported file types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
va r i a bl e =va l ue
The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on
Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked
Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET
command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT
command. They are marked Set Only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-11
INITIALIZE Command
This command restores both the current and default environment variables to their
factory default values and updates the printer NVRAM. This command affects all of
page 3-52, except the following:
• All read only variables
• PASSWORD
• LANG
• LRESOURCESAVE
• LDOWNLOADTARGET
• LPPDS
• LHONORINIT
• LUSDEFAULTS
• PARALLEL
• RESOURCESAVE
Note: This command does not affect LRESOURCE variables listed in
Syntax:
@PJ L I NI TI ALI ZE[ <CR>] <LF>
RESET Command
This command resets the current environment variables to the settings stored in the
printer NVRAM. Therefore, any variables modified by the PJL SET command are
returned to their default value after execution of the PJL RESET command.
Syntax:
@PJ L RESET[ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-12
Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
The following common variables are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript
emulation, unless otherwise noted. Therefore, the [c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
parameter should not be specified.
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
AUTOCONT
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Continue
0, 5 to 255, OFF, ON
0
A value of 0 or OFF indicates Auto Continue is
disabled. A value of ON indicates Auto Continue is set
to 30.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE on the Auto Continue variable
returns a numeric value.
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
BINDING
Duplex Bind
LONGEDGE, SHORTEDGE
1, 2, 4, Auto
LONGEDGE
1
BITSPERPIXEL
Image
Enhancement
Technology and
Image
Enhancement
Technology Type
A value of 1 indicates the Image Enhancement
Technology setting is set to Off. A value of 2 or 4
indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting
is set to On.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Image
Enhancement Technology as follows:
• If Image Enhancement Technology is set to Off, 1 is
returned.
• If Image Enhancement Technology is set to On, 2
or 4 is returned depending on the Image
Enhancement Technology Type setting. If Image
Enhancement Technology Type is set to On, the
numerical value of BITSPERPIXEL is returned. If
Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to
Auto, a value of 2 or 4 is returned depending on the
amount of total memory installed.
CLEARABLEWARNINGS Auto Continue
JOB, ON
ON
1
from operator
panel non-fatal
(READ only)
If Auto Continue is set to On, JOB is returned.
If Auto Continue is set to Off, ON is returned.
warning messages
COPIES
Number of copies 1 to 999
of each page
Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-13
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
CPLOCK
Disables menus
ON, OFF
OFF
(DEFAULT only)
ON disables the printer operator panel menus.
OFF enables menus.
1 to 5
DENSITY
Print Darkness
2, 3, 4
(Model specific)
• 1 = Lightest
• 2 = Lighter
• 3 = Normal
• 4 = Darker
• 5 = Darkest
To determine the default value of your printer, see
DUPLEX
Duplex
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
OFF
ECONOMODE
FORMATTERNUMBER
(READ only)
Toner Saver
Unique printer
identifier
The value of the NVRAM serial number field is
returned.
Set by printer
manufacturer
The NVRAM serial number field is set to the printer
serial number. In order to guarantee that a unique
identifier exists in this field, the printer writes a random
alphanumeric string into this field whenever the critical
byte area in NVRAM is re-initialized.
FORMLINES
Lines per page
Print and Hold
1 to 255
60, 64
(Country specific)
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
HOLD
ON, OFF, STORE, PROOF
OFF
(SET only)
The HOLD variable interacts with the HOLDKEY and
HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see
HOLDKEY
(SET only)
Print and Hold PIN “PIN”
PIN is a text string consisting of exactly four numerals.
NULL
(no PIN)
Only the numerals 1 through 6 are valid.
Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no PIN is specified.
The HOLDKEY variable interacts with the HOLD and
HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see
HOLDTYPE as follows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-14
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
HOLDTYPE
(SET only)
Print and Hold
Type
PUBLIC, PRIVATE
PUBLIC
The HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE variables
interact with each other as follows:
• When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to a
valid PIN, and HOLDTYPE is set to Private,
Confidential Print capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Repeat Print
capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to Store, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Reserve Print
capability is available.
• When HOLD is set to Proof, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”,
and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Verify Print
capability is available.
• Print and Hold capabilities are not available with
any other possible combination of HOLD,
HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE settings.
IMAGEADAPT
(DEFAULT only)
INTRAY2
Resolution
reduction
ON, OFF
ON
Tray lock - Tray 2 UNLOCKED, LOCKED
Tray lock - Tray 3 UNLOCKED, LOCKED
Tray lock - Tray 4 UNLOCKED, LOCKED
Tray lock - Tray 5 UNLOCKED, LOCKED
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
INTRAY3
INTRAY4
INTRAY5
INTRAY1SIZE
(SET only)
Tray 1 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, COM10, COM9,
MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE,
STATEMENT
INTRAY2SIZE
(SET only)
Tray 2 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
INTRAY3SIZE
(SET only)
Tray 3 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
INTRAY4SIZE
(SET only)
Tray 4 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
INTRAY5SIZE
(SET only)
Tray 5 installed
size, default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4,
JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER,
LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
JOBNAME
(SET only)
Print and Hold
Jobname
“jobname”
NULL
(No jobname)
jobname is a text string truncated to 24 characters.
Note: A null (“ ”) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no Print and Hold Jobname is specified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-15
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
JOBOFFSET
Offset Pages
ON, OFF, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENCOPIES
OFF
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Offset
Pages as follows:
• If Offset Pages is set to Off, OFF is returned.
• If Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs or Between
Copies, ON is returned.
Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of
the same print job in two separate groups in an output
bin.
LANG
Default display
language
DANISH, GERMAN, ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, Country specific
ITALIAN, DUTCH, NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH,
PORTUGUESE, FINNISH, JAPANESE, RUSSIAN,
POLISH, HUNGARIAN, TURKISH, CZECH
(DEFAULT only)
LOWTONER
Toner Alarm
ON, OFF, CONTINUE, STOP
ON, CONTINUE
(Model specific)
(DEFAULT only)
A value of ON or CONTINUE indicates the Toner
Alarm setting is set Off. The value of OFF or STOP
indicates the Toner Alarm setting is Single.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Toner
Alarm as follows:
• If Toner Alarm is set to Off, CONTINUE is returned.
• If Toner Alarm is set to Single, STOP is returned.
• If Toner Alarm is set to Continuous, STOP is
returned.
MANUALFEED
(READ only)
MEDIATYPE
Manual feed
selection
OFF
OFF
Printer always returns OFF.
Default paper
source, default
formatting size
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
custom print material types. The text string is
truncated to 24 characters.
MPTRAY
Multipurpose
feeder
configuration
CASSETTE, MANUAL, FIRST
CASSETTE
PORTRAIT
(DEFAULT only)
Sets the configuration of the Multipurpose Feeder.
ORIENTATION
Print orientation
PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE
This variable does not affect PostScript emulation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-16
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
OUTBIN
Output Bin
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Output Bin setting
returns:
DINQUIRE or
Output Bin setting
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
PAGEPROTECT
Page Protect
AUTO, ON
AUTO
A value of ON indicates the Page Protect setting is set
On. The value of AUTO indicates the Page Protect
setting is set Off.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Page
Protect as follows:
• If Page Protect is set Off, AUTO is returned.
• If Page Protect is set On, ON is returned.
PAPER
Default paper
source, default
formatting size
Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER,
JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO,
LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-17
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
PARALLEL
Parallel Protocol
SLOW, FAST
FAST
(DEFAULT only)
(Port Specific)
A value of SLOW indicates the Parallel Protocol
setting is Standard. The value of FAST indicates the
Parallel Protocol setting is FASTBYTES.
INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the
Parallel Protocol as follows:
• If Parallel Protocol is set as Standard, SLOW is
returned.
• If Parallel Protocol is set as Fastbytes, FAST is
returned.
PASSWORD
Default password 0 to 65535
for PJL NVRAM
0
(DEFAULT only)
Locks the printer operator panel to keep the user
security
defaults from changing. See your printer
documentation for more information.
The Default PJL password is 0.
If the PJL password is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns
ENABLED. If the PJL password is equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable
returns DISABLED. See the PASSWORD parameter
information.
PERSONALITY
(Port specific)
SmartSwitch
settings
PCL, POSTSCRIPT, AUTO
AUTO
PERSONALITY controls the SmartSwitch settings for
the interface link on which the PJL command is
received.
If AUTO is sent, both PS SmartSwitch and PCL
Smartswitch menu settings are set to ON.
If PCL is sent, PS SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PCL
SmartSwitch is set to ON.
If POSTSCRIPT is sent, PCL SmartSwitch is set to
OFF and PS SmartSwitch is set to ON.
When queried, AUTO is returned if both SmartSwitch
settings are ON. If one SmartSwitch setting is OFF,
the printer language whose SmartSwitch setting is ON
is returned. If both SmartSwitch settings are OFF, the
default printer language is returned.
POWERSAVE
Power Save
feature
ON, OFF
ON
(DEFAULT only)
ON enables the power-saving feature.
OFF disables the power-saving feature.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000
or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot
have Power Saver disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-18
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
POWERSAVETIME
(DEFAULT only)
Power Save time, 0 to 120 (Model specific)
20
in minutes
0 to 240 (Model specific)
(0 indicates the Power Saver Time feature is
disabled.)
The time the printer remains idle before it enters
Power Save mode when POWERSAVE is On.
Note: If a value greater than 120 or 240 is specified by
a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to
120 or 240 based on the printer model.
QTY
Collation -
Collated Copies
(QTY)
0 to 999
0
(SET only)
Used to request the number of collated copies of a
print job.
If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is not equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting
for QTY. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is set to
Off, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0.
Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999.
REPRINT
Jam Recovery
Print Resolution
Resource Save
ON, OFF, AUTO
AUTO
600
RESOLUTION
RESOURCESAVE
(DEFAULT only)
300, 600, 1200
ON, OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
(Model specific)
ON indicates Resource Save is set On.
OFF and AUTO indicate Resource Save is set to Off.
Languages” on page B-1 for the default value of your
printer.
RET
Print Quality
Enhancement
Technology
(PQET)
OFF, DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, ON
ON
90
If this value is set through PJL, the same value is
returned on a PJL inquiry.
DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, and ON values indicate that
PQET is On. OFF indicates PQET is Off.
TIMEOUT
Print timeout,
in seconds
0 to 255
The time the printer remains idle before the job is
forced to print.
Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET
or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-19
Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
USERNAME
(SET only)
Print and Hold
Username
“username”
NULL
(No username)
username is a text string truncated to 24 characters.
Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and
indicates no Print and Hold Username is specified.
WIDEA4
A4 width
NO, YES
NO
NO indicates the A4 width is 198 mm.
YES indicates the A4 width is 203 mm.
Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
The following variables are unique to some Lexmark printers and are supported for
both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. Therefore, the [c omma nd
modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter should not be specified.
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LACTIVEBINRESET
(DEFAULT only)
LADVANCEDSTATUS
(DEFAULT only)
(Port specific)
Active Bin
Reset
MANUAL, AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
Advanced
Status
ON, OFF
ON
ON enables parallel bidirectional support.
OFF disables parallel bidirectional support.
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
LALARMCONTROL
(DEFAULT only)
LAUTOCRLF
Alarm Control
SINGLE
Auto CR after
LF
ON, OFF
OFF
LAUTOLFCR
Auto LF after
CR
ON, OFF
OFF
LBLANKPAGES
Blank Pages
DONOTPRINT, PRINT
DONOTPRINT
Note: Some printers have a fixed value of
DONOTPRINT.
LBONDLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LBONDLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Bond Length
NORMAL, SHORT
OFF, DUPLEX
NORMAL
OFF
Bond Paper
Loading
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-20
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LBONDOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
Type/Bin - Bond OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
bond paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Bond setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Bond setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LBONDTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LBONDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LBWLOCK
Bond Texture
Bond Weight
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
ON, OFF
ROUGH
NORMAL
OFF
Black & White
Lock
LCANCEL
Cancel Control ON, OFF
ON
LCARDSTOCKLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Card Stock
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
LCARDSTOCKLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Card Stock
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-21
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
Card Stock
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on card
stock.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Card Stock setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Card Stock setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Card Stock
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Card Stock
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
LCOLLATION
Collation Mode ON, OFF
If Collation is ON, the pages of the print job are
collated. For example, if the job contains three pages
and two copies are requested, collated output prints
pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. If collation is set to OFF,
uncollated output prints pages 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3.
LCOLORCORRECTION
Indicates which NONE, DISPLAY, SWOP, OFF, AUTO, VIVID,
color target the DUOTONE, MANUAL
AUTO, VIVID
(Model specific)
printer
emulates
Printer Languages” on page B-4 for the default value
of your printer.
LCOLOREDLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Colored Paper
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-22
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCOLOREDLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
LCOLOREDOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Colored Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Assign
Type/Bin -
Colored Paper
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
colored paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Colored Paper setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Colored Paper
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCOLOREDTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Colored Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
CMYK, RGB, BLACK
NORMAL
NORMAL
LCOLOREDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Colored Paper
Weight
LCOLORMODEL
Color Model
RGB, CMYK
(Model specific)
LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH
Universal Units INCHES, MILLIMETERS
of Measure
INCHES,
MILLIMETERS
(Country specific)
Universal Width 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm
3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in.
216, 305 mm
8.5, 12 in.
(Model and
country specific)
Note: Values are determined to be inches or
millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-23
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT
Universal
Height
76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm
3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in.
356, 360, 457 mm
14, 14.17, 18 in.
(Model and
Note: Values are determined to be inches or
millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
setting.
country specific)
LCUSTOMPAPERFEED
Universal Feed SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE
Direction
SHORTEDGE
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE1
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-24
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 1 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 1 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 1
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 1 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-25
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE2
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 2 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 2 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin
Custom Type 2
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 2 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-26
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE3
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 3 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 3 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 3
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 3 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-27
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE4
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 4 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 4 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin
Custom Type 4
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 4 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-28
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE5
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 5 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 5 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 5
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-29
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 5 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 NORMAL, SHORT
Length
NORMAL
OFF
LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 OFF, DUPLEX
Paper Loading
LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY,
PAPER
Media
LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE,
COTTONPAPER
LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 "name"
Name
CUSTOMTYPE6
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
DISABLED
Custom Type 6 OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
custom type 6 paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 6 setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Custom Type 6
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-30
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
Texture
NORMAL
LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Custom Type 6 LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Weight
NORMAL
RAM
LDOWNLOADTARGET
(SET only)
Download
Target
RAM, FLASH, FLASH1, DISK, DISK1
If the device specified as the download target is write
or read/write password protected, the download target
will not be changed.
LDRYTIMEDELAY
Dry Time Delay 0, 3 ... 30, OFF, AUTO
OFF
LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS
Delete or Save DELETE, SAVE
DELETE
Print and Hold
Jobs
LENVELOPEENHANCE
(DEFAULT only)
Envelope
Enhance
ON, OFF
ON
LENVELOPELENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Envelope
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
LENVELOPEOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
Envelope
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
envelopes.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Envelope setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Envelope setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-31
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LENVELOPETEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LENVELOPEWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LESCCHAR
Envelope
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
Envelope
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
0 to 255
NORMAL
27
ESC Character
Substitution
(READ only)
(Port specific)
LFAXRESOLUTION
(SET only)
Fax Resolution STANDARD, FINE, SUPERFINE, ULTRAFINE
STANDARD
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXRESOLUTION variable. For more information,
LFAXREDIAL
(SET only)
Fax Redial
0 to 14
5
3
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIAL
variable. For more information, see “Status Readback
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY
(SET only)
Fax Redial
Frequency
1 to 200
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY variable. For more
information, see “Status Readback Commands” on
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG
(SET only)
Fax
Transmission
Log
PRINT, DONOTPRINT, PRINTERROR
PRINTERROR
ENVELOPE
OFF
Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when
no SET command has modified the
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG variable. For more
information, see “Status Readback Commands” on
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE
LGLOSSYLOADING
Envelope
Feeder Paper
Type
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Glossy Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-32
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN
Assign Type/
Bin - Glossy
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
Glossy paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Glossy setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Glossy setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LGLOSSYTEXTURE
LGLOSSYWEIGHT
LHOLEPUNCHALARM
LHOLEPUNCHMODE
Glossy Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
2HOLE, 3HOLE, 4HOLE
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
Glossy Paper
Weight
Hole Punch
Alarm
Hole Punch
Mode
3HOLE (US)
4HOLE (non-US)
LHONORINIT
Honor INIT
Signal
HONORSIGNAL, DONOTHONORSIGNAL
-100 to 100
DONOTHONOR
SIGNAL
(DEFAULT only)
(Port specific)
LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS
Image
0
Brightness
LIMAGECONTRAST
LIMAGEENHANCE
Image Contrast -100 to 100
0
Image
ON, OFF
OFF
Enhancement
Technology
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-33
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
2, 4
LIMAGEENHANCETYPE
Image
2, 4, AUTO
Enhancement
Technology
Type
(Model specific)
LIMAGEORIENTATION
Page Image
Orientation
DONOTROTATE, ROTATEPAPER,
ROTATEENVELOPES, ROTATESTAPLED,
ROTATESTAPLEDANDENVELOPES, ROTATEALL
DONOTROTATE
Note: The factory
default is
ROTATEPAPER if
an optional
finisher is
installed.
LIMAGESMOOTHING
LINFEEDERSIZE
Image
Smoothing for
PostScript
ON, OFF
OFF
Envelope
COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
COM10, DL
feeder installed OTHERENVELOPE
size, default
(Country specific)
formatting size
LINKALERT
Ink Alert
ON, OFF
OFF
Displays a printer attendance message when an ink
cartridge is low.
LINMPFEEDERSIZE
Multipurpose
Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, JISB4, B5PAPER, JISB5,
LETTER, A4
feeder installed CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL,
(Country specific)
size, default
LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
formatting size
Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
LJAMRECOVERY
LLABELSLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Jam Recovery
Labels Length
ON, OFF, AUTO
AUTO
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
LLABELSLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Labels Paper
Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-34
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LLABELSOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
Labels
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
labels.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Labels setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Labels setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LLABELSTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Labels Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
NORMAL
LLABELSWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Labels Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
LLASTTRAYRENUMBER
Last Tray
Renumber
OFF, TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5,
MPFEEDER
OFF
LLEFTMARGINOFFSET
Left Margin
Offset
-128 to 127
0
LLETTERHEADLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Letterhead
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
LLETTERHEADLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Letterhead
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-35
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LLETTERHEADOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
Letterhead
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
letterhead paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Letterhead setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Letterhead setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LLETTERHEADTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Letterhead
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
NORMAL
LLETTERHEADWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Letterhead
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
RGB Text
SRGBVIVID
LMANUALCOLORRGB-
GRAPHICS
Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
RGB Graphics
SRGBVIVID
LMANUALCOLORRGB-
IMAGE
Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY
RGB Image
SRGBDISPLAY
LMANUALCOLORCMYK-
TEXT
Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
CMYK Text
USCMYK (US)
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
LMANUALCOLORCMYK-
GRAPHICS
Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
CMYK
Graphics
USCMYK (US)
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-36
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LMANUALCOLORCMYK-
IMAGE
Manual Color - OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK
CMYK Image
USCMYK (US)
EUROCMYK
(non-US)
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE
Manual
Envelope,
default
COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5,
OTHERENVELOPE
COM10, DL
(Country specific)
formatting size
Manual
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
ENVELOPE
Envelope Type CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, “name”
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
custom print material types. The text string is
truncated to 24 characters.
LMANUALPAPERSIZE
LMANUALPAPERTYPE
Manual Paper,
default
formatting size
A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER,
CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, JISB4, JISB5,
LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17
LETTER, A4
(Country specific)
Manual Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
(Model specific)
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE
Multipurpose
Feeder Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4,
CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
print material types. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LMULTIPAGEBORDER
LMULTIPAGEORDER
Multipage
Border
NONE, SOLID
NONE
Multipage
Order
HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, REVHORIZONTAL,
REVVERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-37
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LMULTIPAGEPRINT
Multipage
Printing
OFF, 2UP, 3UP, 4UP, 6UP, 9UP, 12UP, 16UP
OFF
LMULTIPAGEVIEW
LNPAP
Multipage View AUTO, SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE
AUTO
AUTO
NPA Protocol
Setting
ON, OFF, AUTO
(READ only)
This value is reported for the interface link that the
command is received.
(Port specific)
LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 1 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN1
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 2 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN2
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 3 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN3
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 4 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN4
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 5 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN5
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-38
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 6 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN6
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 7 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN7
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 8 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN8
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME
(DEFAULT only)
Optional Output "name"
Bin 9 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN9
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME Optional Output "name"
Bin 10 Name
OPTIONAL
OUTBIN10
(DEFAULT only)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LOUTBINCONFIG
(DEFAULT only)
Configure
Output Bins
MAILBOX, LINK, MAILBOXOVERFLOW,
LINKOPTIONAL, TYPEASSIGNMENT
MAILBOX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-39
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LOVERFLOWOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Overflow Bin
UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
If an output bin is full, print jobs assigned to that
output bin exit to the assigned overflow output bin.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Bin setting
returns:
Overflow Bin
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LOVERFLOWTIMER
(DEFAULT only)
Overflow Timer, 0 to 255
in minutes
0
A value of 0 (zero) indicates Overflow Timer is set to
Disabled.
If Overflow Timer is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns zero.
If Overflow Timer is set to a numeric value, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting
returns that value.
LPAGECOUNT
(READ only)
Page Count
Print Area
0 to 999999
0
LPAGEMODE
LPAPERSOURCE
NORMAL, WHOLEPAGE, FULLPAGE
NORMAL
Default paper
source
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER,
MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE (Model specific)
TRAY1, TRAY2
Note: If any optional source is specified, but it is not
installed, the default paper source is not changed.
Printer Languages” on page B-4 for the default value
of your printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-40
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
ON
LPICTUREGRADE
LPLAINLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
LPLAINOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
PictureGrade™ ON, OFF
Plain Paper
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Assign
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
Type/Bin - Plain OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
Paper
DISABLED
(Model specific)
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
plain paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Plain setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Plain setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LPLAINTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
LPLAINWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
LPOWERSAVER
(DEFAULT only)
Plain Paper
Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
NORMAL
20
Plain Paper
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
Power Saver
time, in minutes
0 to 120 (Model specific)
0 to 240 (Model specific)
(0 indicates the Power Saver feature is disabled.)
Note: If a value outside the possible value range is
specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value
is changed to the closest value within the possible
value range.
Some printer models released in the year 2000 or
later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have
Power Saver disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-41
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPPDS
Activate
ON, OFF
OFF
Personal
(DEFAULT only)
Use ON to enable PPDS printer language and OFF to
disable PPDS printer language. After this command is
processed, the printer performs a Power On Reset
(POR) to activate the changes.
Printer Data
Stream (PPDS)
printer
language
Note: The following printer settings in NVRAM are
changed when PPDS is activated:
• PCL and PS SmartSwitch settings for each port are
turned off.
• Printer Language is set to PPDS.
LPPDSFORMLINES
(DEFAULT only)
Lines Per Page 1 to 255
(PPDS)
64, 68
(Country specific)
LPPDSLINESPERINCH
(DEFAULT only)
Lines Per Inch
0.25 to 30.00 in increments of 0.25
6.00
Note: If a Lines Per Inch setting outside this range is
specified, the printer defaults to the closest number in
the range.
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Preprinted
Paper Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
OFF
LPREPRINTEDLOADING
(DEFAULT only)
Preprinted
Paper Loading
OFF, DUPLEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-42
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN
Assign
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
Type/Bin -
Preprinted
Paper
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
preprinted paper.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Preprinted Paper setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
Preprinted paper
setting
DINQUIRE or
INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE
(DEFAULT only)
Preprinted
Paper Texture
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
ON, OFF
NORMAL
NORMAL
ON
LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Preprinted
Paper Weight
LPRINTBUFFER
Print Buffer
control
If ON is selected, Print Buffer displays with the
Waiting message.
If OFF is selected, Print Buffer does not display with
the Waiting message.
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME
(SET only)
Printhead Idle
Time
0 to 15 seconds
0
LPRINTERUSAGE
Printer Usage
MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD
MAXSPEED,
MAXYIELD
(Model specific)
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON
(DEFAULT only)
Disable Print
Menus from
front panel
ON, OFF
ON
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-43
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LPRINTQUALITY
Print Quality
Mode
QUICKPRINT, NORMAL, PRESENTATION,
GRAPHICS, IMAGES, 1200IMAGEQ, INKSAVER,
NORMAL, BEST
NORMAL
LPUNCH
Hole Punch
ON, OFF
OFF
LREAROUTBINNAME
RearOutput Bin "name"
Name
REAROUTBIN
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LREPEATPRINTLIMIT
(DEFAULT only)
Print and Hold
Repeat Print
Job Limit
0 to 50 jobs
5
Specifies the number of Repeat Print jobs that can be
held in printer memory.
If the Repeat Print Job Limit setting is not equal to 0, a
DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting
for LREPEATPRINTLIMIT. If Repeat Print Job Limit
setting is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE
returns 0.
LRESET
Reset Control
ON, OFF
ON
When the LRESET variable is set to ON, RESET
PRINTER is available in the JOB MENU when the
printer is in the Busy or Waiting state. This is true for
most printers with a printer operator panel.
If this variable is set to OFF, RESET PRINTER is not
available.
LRESOURCESAVE
(DEFAULT only)
Resource Save ON, OFF
OFF
LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET
Right Margin
Offset
-10 to 10
0
LSCREENING
Color
COLORGRADE, IMAGESONLY, IET
COLORGRADE
Screening
Selections
LSEPARATORSHEETS
Indicates where NONE, BETWEENCOPIES, BETWEENJOBS,
NONE
TRAY1
separator
BETWEENPAGES
sheets are
placed within
the print job
LSEPARATORSOURCE
Indicates which TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER,
source contains MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE
the separator
sheets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-44
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME
(DEFAULT only)
Standard
Output
Bin Name
"name"
UPPER
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
When queried, the quotes are not returned around the
string name. The default name is returned unless you
have specified a custom name.
LSTROKEWIDTH
PostScript
minimum stroke
width
1 to 255
1 pel or 1/600th
inch
The width of a line or a stroke between two points.
LSTAPLE
Staple Job
ON, OFF, AUTO, FRONT, BACK, DUAL, 0, 1, 2
OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS
OFF
OFF
LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM
(DEFAULT only)
LSTAPLETESTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Staples Empty
Alarm
Staple Priming
Bin
OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2,
OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4,
OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6,
OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8,
OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10
OPTIONALOUT-
BIN1, OPTIONAL
OUTBIN2
(Model specific)
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE
(DEFAULT only)
Staple Priming
Source
TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5,
MPFEEDER
TRAY1
LSUBSTITUTESIZE
Substitute Size OFF, LETTERA4, STATEMENTA5, 11X17A3,
ALLLISTED
OFF, LETTERA4,
ALLLISTED
(Model specific)
LTHINCOAT
Thin Coat
ON, OFF
0 to 255
ON
0
LTOPBINROTATE
(DEFAULT only)
Top Bin
Timeout,
in minutes
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on LTOPBINROTATE
returns the numeric value.
LTOPMARGINOFFSET
Top Margin
Offset
-128 to 127
0
LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH
(DEFAULT only)
Transparency
Length
NORMAL, SHORT
NORMAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-45
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN
(DEFAULT only)
Assign
Type/Bin -
Transparency
UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, UPPER,
OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3,
OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5,
OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7,
OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9,
OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name”
DISABLED
(Model specific)
name is a variable that allows for custom naming of
optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24
characters.
Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on
transparencies.
A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin -
Transparency setting returns:
Assign Type/Bin -
DINQUIRE or
Transparency setting INQUIRE value
Standard Bin
Bin 1
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
UPPER
OPTIONALOUTBIN1
OPTIONALOUTBIN2
OPTIONALOUTBIN3
OPTIONALOUTBIN4
OPTIONALOUTBIN5
OPTIONALOUTBIN6
OPTIONALOUTBIN7
OPTIONALOUTBIN8
OPTIONALOUTBIN9
OPTIONALOUTBIN10
“name”
Bin 9
Bin 10
“name”
LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE Transparency
SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH
NORMAL
NORMAL
PLAIN
Texture
(DEFAULT only)
LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT
(DEFAULT only)
Transparency
Weight
LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper -
Tray 1
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
for Transp-
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
TRANSPARENC
Y
arency- Tray 1
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper -
Tray 2
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE2
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
for Trans-
parency - Tray
2
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
TRANSPARENC
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-46
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper -
Tray 3
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
for Trans-
parency - Tray
3
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
TRANSPARENC
Y
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE
PAPER
Detected Type
for Paper -
Tray 4
PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3,
CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE4
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE
TRANSPARENCY
Detected Type
for Trans-
parency - Tray
4
TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5
TRANSPARENC
Y
LTRAY1AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 1
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
ON
LTRAY2AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 2
ON
LTRAY3AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 3
ON
LTRAY4AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 4
ON
LTRAY5AUTOSIZE
(DEFAULT only)
Auto Size
Sensing for
Tray 5
ON
LTRAY1PAPERTYPE
Tray 1 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-47
Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LTRAY2PAPERTYPE
Tray 2 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE2
(Model specific)
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
Printer Languages” on page B-4 for the default value
for your printer.
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE
Tray 3 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE3
(Model specific)
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
Printer Languages” on page B-4 for the default value
for your printer.
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE
Tray 4 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE4
(Model specific)
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE
Tray 5 Paper
Type
PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO,
GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND,
PLAIN,
CUSTOMTYPE5
(Model specific)
TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS,
LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED,
ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2,
CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5,
CUSTOMTYPE6, "name"
name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters.
LTRAY1RENUMBER
LTYPE1FONTS
Tray 1
Renumber
OFF, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER
OFF
ON
Enables Type 1 OFF, ON
fonts for PCL
emulation
LUSDEFAULTS
(DEFAULT only)
US/non-US
defaults
US, NONUS
US, NONUS
(Country specific)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-48
Common Variables for PCL Emulation
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Use these variables only for PCL emulation. The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example:
@PJ L SET LPARM: PCL FONTSOURCE=I <CR><LF>
Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
FONTNUMBER
FONTSOURCE
Font Number
Font Source
0, 1, .... n
0
I
I, S, M1, M2, M3, M4, D1
I
Internal font source
S
Permanent download fonts
M1, M2,
M3, M4
D1
Flash font source
Disk font source
All other values default to internal font source.
0.08 to 100 (in increments of 0.01)
PITCH
Default pitch
(fixed-pitch fonts)
10.00
12.00
Note: If an invalid pitch is requested, the printer
selects the closest pitch.
PTSIZE
SYMSET
Default point size
(proportionalspaced
fonts)
1 to 1008 (in increments of 0.25)
Note: If an invalid point size is requested, the
printer selects the closest point size.
Symbol set for the
default font
If a symbol set is requested that is not resident PC8, PC850
in the printer, the symbol set is not changed. (Country specific)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-49
Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
The following variables are unique to your printer and are supported in PCL emulation
only. The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL.
For example:
@PJ L SET LPARM: PCL LBI TMAPROUNDI NG=OFF[ <CR>] <LF>
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LA4WIDTH
A4 Width in
millimeters
198, 203
198
LASSIGNFEEDER
Tray Renumber
Assign Envelope
Feeder
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE Tray Renumber
OFF, 0 to 199
Assign Manual
Envelope
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMANUALPAPER
Tray Renumber
Assign Manual Paper
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNMPFEEDER
Tray Renumber
Assign Multipurpose
Feeder
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-50
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LASSIGNTRAY1
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 1
OFF, 0 to 199
OFF
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
LASSIGNTRAY2
LASSIGNTRAY3
LASSIGNTRAY4
LASSIGNTRAY5
LBITMAPROUNDING
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 2
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 3
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 4
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
Tray Renumber
Assign Tray 5
OFF, 0 to 199
Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT
command.
OFF, 0 to 199, NONE
Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE
command.
Bitmap Font Partial
Pel Rounding
ON, OFF
Some printers handle partial pel character
escapement rounding of bitmap fonts differently.
LBITMAPROUNDING offers a way of instructing
the printer how to handle partial pel rounding of
bitmap fonts.
Bitmap rounding is compatible with the Hewlett-
Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
LCOLOREXTENSIONS
Color Extensions
ON, OFF, HPCLJ5
ON
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-51
Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
Variable
Function
Selections
Factory Default
LFONTCOMPATIBILITY
Font Compatibility
Level
PCL5, PCL6
PCL6
LFONTPRIORITY
(SET only)
Font Priority Search
RESOLUTION, NORESOLUTION
RESOLUTION
When RESOLUTION is specified, your printer is
compatible with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s
LaserJet printers.
When NORESOLUTION is specified, font
resolution is removed from the font selection
priority criteria.
Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer
and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Use these variables only for PostScript emulation. The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRI PT. For example:
@PJ L SET LPARM: POSTSCRI PT J AMRECOVERY=OFF[ <CR>] <LF>
Table 3-7: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
Factory
Default
Variable
Function
Selections
JAMRECOVERY
Jam Recovery
ON, OFF
OFF
For queries, when the Jam Recovery setting is set
to Auto, PJL returns the value of OFF. The
remaining two Jam Recovery values, On and Off
are returned by PJL as ON and OFF respectively.
When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery OFF, the
setting is actually set to Auto. When PJL is used to
set Jam Recovery ON, the setting is set to ON.
Changing this variable also affects PCL emulation.
ON, OFF
PRTPSERRS
Print PS Errors
OFF
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-52
Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
The following variables are unique in some printers and are supported in PostScript
emulation only.
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRI PT.
For example:
@PJ L SET LPARM: POSTSCRI PT LPI CTUREGRADE=ON[ <CR>] <LF>
Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
Factory
Default
Variable
Function
Selections
LPICTUREGRADE
LPSFONTPRIORITY
PictureGrade
Font Priority
ON, OFF
ON
RESIDENT, FLASHDISK
RESIDENT
Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
Use the following variables when additional storage devices are installed.
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter of the DEFAULT, INQUIRE, DINQUIRE,
and SET commands must be specified as LRESOURCE: " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype" .
For example:
@PJ L DEFAULT LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " LDESCRI PTI ON=" my
de s c r i pt i on" [ <CR>] <LF>
Values for " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The f i l e na me is case
sensitive.
f i l e t ype
The identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for PCL
macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-53
Using the DEFAULT command to modify any of these variables forces a write to flash
or disk if resource collection mode is set to On before the command is executed. The
DEFAULT command causes a PJL Reset.
Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
Factory
Default
Variable
Function
Selections
LDESCRIPTION
Macro or Symbol "alphanumeric string"
NULL
(no
description)
1
Set Description
(DEFAULT
only)
The description is limited to 16 characters and must be enclosed in
double quotes. If more than 16 characters are specified by the
DEFAULT command, the first 16 characters are used and a PJL
parser warning is issued.
The DINQUIRE command can be used to query the file description.
The description is returned in the response.
LRWLOCK
Read/Write Lock "alphanumeric string"
(password) for an
entire device or a
particular file on
(DEFAULT
only)
This variable can be used with other PJL commands:
• DEFAULT command
NULL
(no
password)
2
the device
The Read/Write password is limited to eight characters. If more
than eight characters are specified by the PJL DEFAULT
command, the password is truncated and a PJL warning is issued.
If a null (" ") password is given, password protection is removed
from the specified device or file.
NOTSET
• DINQUIRE or INQUIRE commands
Use these commands to determine if a password has been
specified for a device or specific file. The response is one of the
following:
NOTSET
The password has not been set or has been reset to
zero.
SET
EXPIRED
The password is defined and active.
The password is reset to zero (flash memory only).
The LDECLARE command can be used to temporarily unlock access
to a device or particular file. See “File and Device Protection
Commands” on page 3-93 for additional information about using
passwords on these devices.
LWLOCK
Write Lock
"alphanumeric string"
NULL
(password) for an
entire device or
particular file on
(no
password)
(DEFAULT
only)
Same as LRWLOCK, except the password limits write-only access
instead of read-write access.
2
the device
1
The macro or symbol set description is printed in the Description field of the Print Directory listing.
2
To password-protect a device, the c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue should be LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : " . The colon (:) and
double quotes (" ") must be specified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-54
Status Readback Commands
Applications can request configuration and status information from the printer using
the Status Readback commands. In addition, the printer can also be instructed to send
unsolicited status information back to the host computer when asynchronous events
occur, such as a memory error or a paper jam.
DINQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the default setting (NVRAM) of the specified
environment variable.
Syntax:
@PJ L DI NQUI RE [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e [ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L DI NQUI RE [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e <CR><LF>
va l ue <CR><LF>
<FF>
where:
[ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter specifies the type of PJL variable to
be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
• A [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter is not required for variables listed
• LPARM: PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-55
• LPARM: POSTSCRI PT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
• LRESOURCE: "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The f i l e na me is case sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for
PCL macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the
supported file types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
va r i a bl e =va l ue
This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a
variable associated with an option that is not installed.
ECHO Command
The ECHO command instructs the printer to return the specified words after the
command is parsed. This command provides a method of capturing the status
information returned by a specific print job.
Syntax:
@PJ L ECHO [ wor ds ] [ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L ECHO [ wor ds ] <CR><LF>
<FF>
wor ds parameter
The wor ds parameter must start with a printable character and can consist of a
combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-56
Note: The ECHO command is terminated by the line feed character.
INFO Command
The INFO command is used to query status information from the printer.
information that can be queried.
See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the
messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED
commands.
Syntax:
@PJ L I NFO c a t e gor y[ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L I NFO c a t e gor y<CR><LF>
[ one or mor e l i ne s of pr i nt a bl e c ha r a c t e r s , s pa c e s , or t a bs ] <CR><LF>
<FF>
c a t e gor y
Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values
Category Values
Description
ID
Returns the model name or the model number stored in the printer
NVRAM.
CONFIG
Returns the printer configuration, including paper sources, paper sizes,
and installed options.
MEMORY
PAGECOUNT
STATUS
Returns the printer available memory.
Returns the printer page count.
Returns the printer current status.
VARIABLES
USTATUS
Returns the printer environment variables and values.
Returns the printer unsolicited status variables and values.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-57
INFO CONFIG Response Syntax (An Example):
@PJL INFO CONFIG<CR><LF>
IN TRAYS [2 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
INTRAY1<CR><LF>
INTRAY2<CR><LF>
MANUAL FEED<CR><LF>
OUT TRAYS [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
UPPER FACEDOWN<CR><LF>
PAPERS [13 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
LETTER<CR><LF>
LEGAL<CR><LF>
A4<CR><LF>
A5<CR><LF>
B5PAPER<CR><LF>
EXECUTIVE<CR><LF>
COM10<CR><LF>
COM9<CR><LF>
MONARCH<CR><LF>
DL<CR><LF>
C5<CR><LF>
B5<CR><LF>
OTHERENVELOPE<CR><LF>
LANGUAGES [1 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
PCL<CR><LF>
USTATUS [4 ENUMERATED]<CR><LF>
DEVICE<CR><LF>
JOB<CR><LF>
PAGE<CR><LF>
TIMED<CR><LF>
FLASH=1048576<CR><LF>
DISK=543283200
MEMORY=2097152<CR><LF>
DISPLAY LINES=2<CR><LF>
SYSTEM FIRMWARE VERSION=250A<CR><LF>
ENGINE FIRMWARE VERSION=0<CR><LF>
<FF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-58
INQUIRE Command
This command is used to query the current setting of the specified environment
variable.
Syntax:
@PJ L I NQUI RE [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e [ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L I NQUI RE [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] va r i a bl e <CR><LF>
va l ue <CR><LF>
<FF>
[ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ]
The [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables
to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on
• A [ c omma nd modi f i e r : va l ue ] parameter is not required for variables listed
• LPARM: PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables
• LPARM: POSTSCRI PT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation.
(See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51,
• LRESOURCE: "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " is required for LRESOURCE vari-
ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID
for a PCL font, and so on. The f i l e na me is case sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for
PCL macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the
supported file types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-59
va r i a bl e =va l ue
This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a
variable associated with an option that is not installed.
USTATUS Command
This command is used to enable and disable unsolicited status from the printer.
Unsolicited status information is sent automatically when an asynchronous event
the asynchronous information that can be enabled and disabled.
Syntax:
@PJ L USTATUS us t a t us va r i a bl e =va l ue [ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L USTATUS us t a t us va r i a bl e <CR><LF>
[ one or mor e l i ne s of pr i nt a bl e c ha r a c t e r s , s pa c e s , or t a bs ] <CR><LF>
<FF>
See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the
messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED
commands.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-60
us t a t us va r i a bl e =va l ue
The following values are supported for the us t a t us va r i a bl e =va l ue parameter.
Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values
Ustatus Variable
Value
Description
DEVICE
ON
Enables unsolicited status for device changes.
VERBOSE
Enables unsolicited status for all device changes.
Also enables warnings from the PJL parser.
OFF
ON
Disables unsolicited status for device changes.
JOB
Enables unsolicited status for job changes. The
printer sends a status message when a job begins
and ends.
OFF
ON
Disables unsolicited status for job changes.
PAGE
TIMED
Enables unsolicited status for page changes. The
printer sends a status message when a printed sheet
reaches the standard output bin.
OFF
Disables unsolicited status for page changes.
5 to 300 in seconds Enables timed unsolicited status. The printer
automatically sends status at a specified time interval.
0
Disables timed unsolicited status.
USTATUSOFF Command
This command turns off unsolicited status. Unsolicited status may also be turned off
by using the USTATUS command on each variable.
Syntax:
@PJ L USTATUSOFF[ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-61
Status Message Format
The format of the returned information from the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE,
and USTATUS TIMED commands is described in this section.
Information Messages
Information messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages
Printer State
Status Code Display String
Online Status
TRUE
Ready
10001
10001
10006
10002
10002
10005
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
Ready
Ready
RDYMSG
TRUE
Ready with Ink Low
Not Ready
88 Ink Low
TRUE
Not Ready
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
In the Menus
Not Ready
Printer reset
Resetting the Printer
88 Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Toner Low
Ready with Replace Toner
Ready with Replace PC Kit
Ready with Replace Fuser
88 Yellow Toner Low
88 Magenta Toner Low
88 Cyan Toner Low
88 Black Toner Low
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
88 Color Print Cartridge Low TRUE
88 Black Print Cartridge Low TRUE
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low TRUE
Replace Toner
Replace PC Kit
Replace Fuser
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see “Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes” on page 3-75.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line
of the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-62
Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages
Printer State
Status Code Display String
Online Status
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
Ready with Replace Transfer
Power Saver with Ink Low
Power Saver mode with Toner Low
Power Saver mode with Replace Toner
Power Saver mode with Replace PC Kit
Power Saver mode with Replace Fuser
Power Saver mode with Replace Transfer
Cancelling Job
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10006
10007
10023
10024
11xyy
12xyy
15ww1
35029
35078
Replace Transfer
88 Ink Low
88 Toner Low
Replace Toner
Replace PC Kit
Replace Fuser
Replace Transfer
Cancelling Job
Busy
Busy
Waiting
Waiting
Input Source Empty
Tray <source #> Empty
Tray <source #> Missing
Bin <bin #> Full
Res Reduced
Powersaver
Input Source Missing
Output Bin Full
Resolution Reduced
Power Saver
x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74.
yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see “Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes” on page 3-75.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line
of the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-63
Auto-Continuable Conditions
These status messages are returned independent of the state of the Auto Continue
menu item. Auto-continuable messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions
Status
Code
Printer State
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
PPDS font error
30014
30016
30016
30016
30016
30016
30016
30017
30018
50 PPDS Font Error
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient collation area
37 Insufficient Collation Area
37 Insufficient Defrag Memory
37 Insufficient Memory
38 Memory Full
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient defragment memory
Intervention required:
insufficient memory
Intervention required:
memory full
Intervention required:
held jobs may not be restored
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored
57 Configuration Change
39 Complex Page
Intervention required:
configuration change
Intervention required:
complex page
Intervention required:
standard serial error
54 Standard Serial Error
Intervention required: serial option error
30018
30018
54 Serial Option 1 Error
54 Parallel Error
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel error
Intervention required:
network software error
30018
30018
30018
54 Std Network Software Error
54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost
56 Standard Serial Disabled
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard serial fax connection lost
Intervention required:
standard serial disabled
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-64
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Printer State
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
serial option disabled
30018
56 Serial 1 Port Disabled
FALSE
Intervention required:
standard parallel port disabled
30018
30018
30018
30018
30019
30026
30027
56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled
56 Parallel Port Disabled
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
parallel port disabled
Intervention required:
parallel port error
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
56 Standard USB Port Disabled
35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory
55 Insufficient Fax Buffer
Intervention required:
standard USB port disabled
Intervention required:
resource save off deficient memory
Intervention required:
insufficient fax buffer
Intervention required:
standard parallel ENA connection lost
54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
36 Resolution Reduced
Intervention required: standard parallel port 30027
disabled
Intervention required: resolution reduced
30029
30031
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
Print Jobs on Disk? or
print jobs on disk request
Print Jobs on Disk. Go/Stop?
Intervention required:
30031
Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
FALSE
printer powered off, disk installed with Print
and Hold jobs on the disk
Intervention required:
short paper
30034
30035
30035
30036
30036
30036
30036
34 Short Paper
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
flash full
52 Flash Full
Intervention required:
disk full
62 Disk Full
Intervention required:
defective flash
51 Defective Flash
53 Unformatted Flash
61 Defective Disk
63 Unformatted Disk
Intervention required:
unformatted flash
Intervention required:
defective disk
Intervention required:
unformatted disk
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-65
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Printer State
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
30075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
FALSE
scheduled maintenance
Intervention required:
resource save off deficient memory
30076
30076
30107
30107
30107
30107
30107
30107
30112
30112
30112
30112
30112
30113
30113
32001
32001
32002
35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory
37 Insufficient Collation Area
Empty Hole Punch Box
Empty Box M
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
insufficient collation area
Intervention required:
hole punch box full
Intervention required:
hole punch box full
Intervention required:
hole punch box missing
Insert Box M
Intervention required:
staple cartridge missing
Insert Staple Cartridge
Insert Stapler
Intervention required:
insert stapler
Intervention required:
priming failed
Priming Failed, Retry. Go/Stop?
54 Network x Software Error
56 Serial Port x Disabled
54 Serial Option x Error
54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost
56 USB Port x Disabled
54 Par x ENA Connection Lost
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
Operation Failed Jobs on Disk
Operation Failed Faxes on Disk
52 Flash Full
Intervention required:
network x software error
Intervention required:
serial port x disabled
Intervention required:
serial option x error
Intervention required:
serial x fax connection lost
Intervention required:
USB port disabled
Intervention required:
parallel x ENA connection lost
Intervention required:
parallel x port disabled
Intervention required:
disk operation failed jobs on disk
Intervention required:
disk operation failed faxes on disk
Intervention required:
flash full
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-66
Table 3-13: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
Status
Printer State
Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
disk full
32002
62 Disk Full
FALSE
Intervention required:
disk corrupted
32015
32030
32052
32052
32052
32056
32056
35075
35075
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
58 Too Many Flash Options
53 Unformatted Flash
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
too many flash options installed
Intervention required:
unformatted flash
Intervention required:
unformatted disk
63 Unformatted Disk
Intervention required:
unsupported disk format
64 Unsupported Disk Format
51 Defective Flash
Intervention required:
defective flash
Intervention required:
defective disk
61 Defective Disk
Intervention required:
scheduled maintenance
80 Scheduled Maintenance
81 Scheduled Maintenance
Intervention required:
scheduled maintenance
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
Intervention required: belt maintenance
40038
40038
40038
40038
80 Fuser Maintenance
80 Fuser Life Warning
80 Belt Life Warning
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
fuser/belt maintenance
80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning
Intervention required: fuser maintenance
Intervention required: belt maintenance
40038
40038
40038
80 Fuser Exhausted
80 Belt Exhausted
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
fuser/belt maintenance
80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted
Intervention required: ITU maintenance
40038
83 ITU Maintenance
FALSE
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of
the message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-67
Attendance Conditions
Attendance conditions require operator intervention. Attendance messages are
returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
insert coating roll
40010
30 Coating Roll Missing
FALSE
1
Intervention required:
insert print unit
40010
40010
40010
40021
40021
40021
30 XXXX Print Unit Missing
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert hole punch box
Insert Hole Punch Box
Insert PC Cartridge
Intervention required:
insert photoconductor cartridge
Intervention required:
printer upper door open
Cover Open or Close Top Covers or
Insert Cartridge or Close Door
Intervention required:
close toner box cover
Close Cover A
Intervention required:
defective print cartridge or defective
ink cartridge
31 Defective Print Cartridge
31 Defective Cartridge XXXX
Intervention required:
unsupported print cartridge
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
32 Unsupported Print Cartridge
32 Unsupported XXXX Cartridge
32 Unsupported Cartridge
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
unsupported print cartridge
Intervention required:
unsupported cartridge
Intervention required:
change cartridge invalid refill
Change Cartridge Invalid Refill
Cartridge Life Expired XXXX
Intervention required:
cartridge life expired
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-68
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
cartridge life warning
40021
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX
31 Missing Cartridge XXXX
31 Missing Printhead
32 Unsupported Printhead
40 Tray x Size Sense Error
41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray
Close Cover
FALSE
Intervention required:
missing cartridge
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
missing printhead
Intervention required:
unsupported printhead
Intervention required:
size sense error
Intervention required:
open bin exit tray
Intervention required:
printer cover open
Intervention required:
open cover
Open Cover
Intervention required:
deflector open
Close Deflector G
Intervention required:
open rear door
Open Rear Door
Intervention required:
close front door
Close Front Door
Intervention required:
close side door
Close Side Door
Intervention required:
close finisher door
Close Finisher Door
Close Finisher Side Door
Close Finisher Top Cover
Close Door <d>
Intervention required:
close finisher side door
Intervention required:
close finisher top cover
Intervention required:
2
close door <d>
Intervention required:
Close Cover <c>
3
close cover <c>
Intervention required:
close tray top cover
Close Tray x Top Cover
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-69
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
print cartridge missing
40021
Insert Print Cartridge
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
40022
40027
40027
40028
40028
40028
40029
40029
40029
40029
40029
40030
40030
40030
40030
40030
40036
2xx Paper Jam
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
check tray connection
Check Tray <source #> Connection
Install Tray x or Cancel Job
Reattach Envelope Feeder
Reattach MP Feeder
Intervention required:
install tray x or cancel job
Intervention required:
envelope feeder detached
Intervention required:
multipurpose feeder detached
Intervention required:
install envelope feeder or cancel job
Install Env Feed or Cancel Job
Reattach Output Bin <bin #>
Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin #y>
Install Bin x or Cancel Job
Check Finisher Installation
Check Mailbox Installation
33 Tray x Config Error
Intervention required:
reattach output bin
Intervention required:
reattach bins
Intervention required:
install bin x or cancel job
Intervention required:
check finisher installation
Intervention required:
check mailbox installation
Intervention required:
tray configuration error
Intervention required:
input configuration error
58 Input Config Error
Intervention required:
too many trays attached
58 Too Many Trays Attached
58 Too Many Bins Attached
58 Too Many Disks Installed
58 Too Many Disks Installed
Intervention required:
too many bins attached
Intervention required:
too many disks installed
Intervention required:
too many disks installed
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-70
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
PerfectFinish™ missing
40037
31 PerfectFinish Missing
87 PerfectFinish Empty
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning
84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted
88 Toner Low
FALSE
Intervention required:
PerfectFinish empty
40037
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
photo developer nearly exhausted
Intervention required:
photo developer nearly exhausted
Intervention required:
color photo developer exhausted
Intervention required:
black photo developer exhausted
Intervention required:
toner low
Intervention required:
toner low
88 Yellow Toner Low
Intervention required:
toner low
88 Magenta Toner Low
88 Cyan Toner Low
Intervention required:
toner low
Intervention required:
toner low
88 Black Toner Low
Intervention required:
toner empty
88 Yellow Toner Empty
88 Cyan Toner Empty
Intervention required:
toner empty
Intervention required:
toner empty
88 Magenta Toner Empty
88 Black Toner Empty
Intervention required:
toner empty
Intervention required:
toner low
88 Color Print Cartridge Low
88 Black Print Cartridge Low
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
Intervention required:
toner low
Intervention required:
toner low
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-71
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
cartridge low
40038
88 Cartridge Low
<CMYK>
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace photoconductor kit
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40039
40040
40041
40048
40049
40050
40050
40087
40088
40089
40090
40095
Replace PC Kit
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
replace photoconductor kit to continue
Replace PC Kit To Continue
Replace Toner Cartridge
Replace Toner To Continue
Replace Oil Coating Roll
Intervention required:
replace toner cartridge
Intervention required:
replace toner cartridge to continue
Intervention required:
replace oil coating roll
Intervention required:
cartridge empty
89 Cartridge Empty
<CMYK>
Intervention required:
load staples
Load Staples
Intervention required:
priming failed. retry?
Priming Failed. Retry?
Message specified by OPMSG
Message specified by STMSG
Replace Fuser
Intervention required:
OPMSG
Intervention required:
STMSG
Intervention required:
replace fuser
Intervention required:
replace transfer kit
Replace Transfer Kit
Intervention required:
incompatible bin x
59 Incompatible Bin x
59 Incompatible Duplex
59 Incompatible Tray x
59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder
Check Duplex Connection
Intervention required:
incompatible duplex
Intervention required:
incompatible tray x
Intervention required:
incompatible envelope feeder
Intervention required:
check duplex connection
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-72
Table 3-14: PJL Message for Attendance Conditions
Printer State
Status Code
Display String
Online Status
Intervention required:
install duplex or cancel job
40095
Install Duplex or Cancel Job
Close Duplex Door
Insert Duplex Option
Load Staples
FALSE
Intervention required:
duplex cover open
40096
40096
40101
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert duplex option
Intervention required:
load staples
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black cartridges,
respectively. For this message, the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective.
2
3
<d> represents a one-letter designator for each door labeled on the printer.
<c> represents a one-letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer.
Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY
CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG.
Operator Intervention - Paper Handling
When a Load <tray>, Load Manual, or Change <tray> message appears on the printer
operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to
the host computer indicating the paper source and size for the prompt.
Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
The display string is the first line of the message that displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-73
Table 3-15: PJL Messages for Paper Handling
Status
Code
Printer State
Display String*
Online Status
Intervention required:
wrong paper size in tray x
30034
30034
40019
40019
40019
40019
4100x
41xyy
41xyy
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
FALSE
Intervention required:
wrong paper size manual feed
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
Remove Paper Standard Bin
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #>
Remove Paper All Output Bins
Remove Paper <linked set bin name>
Check <source> Paper Guide
34 Incorrect Media
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
remove paper standard bin
Intervention required:
remove paper output bin
Intervention required:
remove paper all output bins
Intervention required:
remove paper
Intervention required:
check <source> paper guide
Intervention required:
incorrect media
Intervention required:
load request
Load <source>...
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
Intervention required:
load manual request
41xyy
Load Manual
FALSE
FALSE
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
Intervention required:
change request
41xyy
Change <source>...
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
Intevention required:
insert duplex pages & press Go.
412yy
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
Insert Tray <source #>
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
insert tray request
4300x
yy represents a media size code. For more information, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74.
* See your printer See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-74
Table 3-16: Tray Codes
X Value
Tray
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Envelope Feeder
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Table 3-17: Media Size Codes
YY Value
00
Media Size
Universal
01
Other Envelope
Letter Paper
Legal Paper
A4 Paper
02
03
04
05
Executive Paper
11 x 17 (Ledger)
A3
06
07
08
Com 10 Envelope
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)
C5 Envelope
DL Envelope
JIS B4
09
10
11
12
13
JIS B5 Paper
B5 Envelope
Custom Media
14
15
16
A3+, JB4 Paper
(Model specific)
17
18
19
JB5 Paper
JPostcard
JDoublePostcard
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-75
Table 3-17: Media Size Codes
YY Value
Media Size
A5
20
21
22
90
Folio
Statement
Com 9 Envelope
Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes
WW Value
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin 1
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Bin 2
Bin 3
Bin 4
Bin 5
Bin 6
Bin 7
Bin 8
Bin 9
Bin 10
Operator Intervention - Paper Jams
When a <#> Paper Jam message appears on the printer operator panel display or
through MarkVision Professional, a message is returned to the host computer
indicating the type and location for the prompt.
Attendance (operator intervention) messages are returned in this form:
CODE=status code
DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes)
ONLINE=online status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-76
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
200 Paper Jam
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4200x
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4201x
4202x
4203x
4204x
4205x
4206x
4207x
4208x
4209x
4210x
4211x
4220x
4221x
4222x
4230x
4231x
201 Paper Jam
202 Paper Jam
203 Paper Jam
204 Paper Jam
205 Paper Jam
206 Paper Jam
207 Paper Jam
208 Paper Jam
209 Paper Jam
210 Paper Jam
211 Paper Jam
220 Paper Jam
221 Paper Jam
222 Paper Jam
230 Paper Jam
231 Paper Jam
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-77
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
232 Paper Jam
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4232x
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4233x
233 Paper Jam
234 Paper Jam
24y Paper Jam
241 Paper Jam
242 Paper Jam
243 Paper Jam
244 Paper Jam
245 Paper Jam
246 Paper Jam
247 Paper Jam
248 Paper Jam
249 Paper Jam
250 Paper Jam
250 Paper Jam
251 Paper Jam
251 Paper Jam
252 Paper Jam
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4234x
Intervention required:
paper jam
424yx
Intervention required:
paper jam
4241wy
4242wy
4243w
4244wy
4245w
4246w
4247wy
4248w
4249w
4250w
4250x
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
4251wy
4251x
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
4252w
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-78
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
253 Paper Jam
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4253w
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4254wy
4255
254 Paper Jam
255 Paper Jam
256 Paper Jam
257 Paper Jam
258 Paper Jam
259 Paper Jam
260 Paper Jam
260 Paper Jam
261 Paper Jam
261 Paper Jam
27z Paper Jam
271 Paper Jam
272 Paper Jam
273 Paper Jam
280 Paper Jam
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
4256w
4257w
4258w
4259wy
4260w
4260x
4261w
4261x
427zx
4271
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
4272
Intervention required:
paper jam
4273
Intervention required:
paper jam
4280x
4280x
4280w
Intervention required:
paper jam
Clear Staple Job from Finisher
280 Paper Jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-79
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
281 Paper Jam
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4281w
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4281x
4282w
4282x
4283w
4283x
4284w
4284x
4285w
4286w
4287
281 Paper Jam
282 Paper Jam
282 Paper Jam
283 Paper Jam
283 Paper Jam
284 Paper Jam
284 Paper Jam
285 Paper Jam
286 Paper Jam
287 Paper Jam
288 Paper Jam
289 Paper Jam
290 Paper Jam
291 Paper Jam
292 Paper Jam
293 Paper Jam
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
Intervention required:
paper jam
4288
Intervention required:
paper jam
4289
Intervention required:
paper jam
4290
Intervention required:
paper jam
4291
Intervention required:
paper jam
4292
Intervention required:
paper jam
4293
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-80
Table 3-19: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
Printer State
Status Code
Display String*
294 Paper Jam
Online Status
Intervention required:
paper jam
4294
FALSE
Intervention required:
paper jam
4295
295 Paper Jam
FALSE
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
* See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages.
Service Errors
Error Code 50000 is returned for all 9xx Service Errors when the printer can return a
status code.
To determine whether your printer supports returning service messages, see
Device Attendance Commands
RDYMSG Command
The RDYMSG command is used to specify a message that appears on the first line of
the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional whenever the
printer is ONLINE (in the Ready or Busy state). This message displays instead of the
Ready or Busy message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-81
Syntax:
@PJ L RDYMSG DI SPLAY = " me s s a ge " [ <CR>] <LF>
OPMSG Command
When an OPMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both
lines of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the
STMSG command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays
instead.
Note: See your printer documentation for information about how to return your
printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy, or
Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through
MarkVision Professional.
A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision
Professional while OPMSG displays.
Syntax:
@PJ L OPMSG DI SPLAY = " me s s a ge " [ <CR>] <LF>
STMSG Command
When a STMSG command is received, the message appears and is allotted both lines
of the display. The printer is taken OFFLINE. This message, along with the OPMSG
command, is the lowest priority, so if another intervention occurs, it displays instead.
Note: See your printer documentation for information about how to return your
printer to the ONLINE state. Once in the ONLINE state, the Ready, Busy, or
Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through
MarkVision Professional.
A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision
Professional while STMSG displays.
Syntax:
@PJ L STMSG DI SPLAY = " me s s a ge " [ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-82
Unique PJL Commands
LBEEP Command
This command causes the printer to beep three times.
Syntax:
@PJ L LBEEP[ <CR>] <LF>
LPORTROTATE Command
This command causes the printer to rotate ports at the next job boundary. The
information to rotate ports is specified in the job header. For example, the printer could
switch from parallel interface to serial interface between jobs.
Syntax:
@PJ L LPORTROTATE[ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-83
LPRINT Commands (Information Pages)
Use these commands to print one of the internal information pages.
@PJ L t e s t pa ge [ <CR>] <LF>
The supported t e s t pa ge values are listed in the following table.
Table 3-20: LPRINT testpage Commands
testpage Value
Description
LPRINTDIRECTORY
Prints both the flash and disk directory listings. If neither flash
memory or a disk is installed, the command is ignored.
LPRINTTESTPAGE
LPRINTMENUS
Prints the test page.
Prints the menu settings page.
Prints the PCL font listing.
Prints the PostScript font listing.
LPRINTPCLFONTS
LPRINTPSFONTS
For example, to print a menu settings page:
Syntax:
@PJ L LPRI NTMENUS[ <CR>] <LF>
LESCAPECHAR Command
This command modifies the code point of the escape character for the host computer
specified by the PORT parameter. The escape character is mapped to code point
0x1B for each host interface port.
Syntax:
@PJ L LESCAPECHAR CHAR=byt e PORT=por t [ <CR>] <LF>
CHAR parameter
The byt e value for the CHAR parameter is the code point of the ASCII character
used for the escape character.
For example, at the factory, the printer uses 0x1B (character <Esc>) for the
escape character. If CHAR = 65 is specified with this command, the printer uses
0x41 (character ‘A’) as the escape character for the host interface port specified
via the PORT parameter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-84
PORT parameter
The following ports are valid parameters for LESCAPECHAR:
• INA
• INA1
• INA2
• INA3
• LOCALTALK1
• LOCALTALK2
• LOCALTALK3
• PARALLEL
• PARALLEL1
• PARALLEL2
• PARALLEL 3
• USB
• USB1
• USB2
• USB3
• SERIAL
• SERIAL1
• SERIAL2
• SERIAL3
• IR
• IR1
• IR2
• IR3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-85
LFAX PHONENUMBER Command
This command tells the printer that the output resulting from the current job is being
sent to the fax processing device instead of to the printer. The current job is printed
and is not sent to the fax processing device if one of the following occurs:
• The printer is not configured for fax send capability
• The command is received with a command that selects an interpreter that
does not support formatting functionality for sending faxes
Syntax:
@PJ L LFAX PHONENUMBER=“ numbe r ” [ STATI ONI D=“ s t a t i on na me” ] [ <CR>] <LF>
PHONENUMBER=“ numbe r ”
The PHONENUMBER parameter is a text string up to 60 characters long. If an
unsupported character is supplied in the PHONENUMBER parameter, the entire
LFAX PHONENUMBER command is ignored.
Table 3-21: LFAX PHONENUMBER “number” Values
Character
Description
1
0 - 9
DTMF digits 0 to 9
1
*
DTMF character *
1
#
DTMF character #
1
A - D
DTMF characters A, B, C, and D
Flash
!
W
Wait for dial tone
@
Wait for silence
&
Wait for credit card tone
Pause
, (comma)
^
Toggles between tone and pulse modes
1
DTMF, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency, is the system used by touch-tone telephones which assigns a
specific frequency, or tone, to each key so it can easily be identified by a microprocessor.
[ STATI ONI D=“ s t a t i on na me ” ]
The STATI ONI D parameter specifies a station name that is sent to the receiving fax
machine to indicate the origin of an incoming fax. The “s t a t i on na me ” is a text string
which is truncated to 20 characters. A null value (“ “) indicates no station ID is
specified. If no station name is specified, the default station name of the printer is
used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-86
LDOWNLOADTARGET Command
This command specifies which device is the target for downloaded files. The target
can be RAM, flash, or disk.
Syntax:
@PJ L SET LDOWNLOADTARGET=va r i a bl e [ <CR>] <LF>
File Commands for Flash or Disk
Use the following commands to manage resources on flash and disk devices:
• LOPENFILE
• LCLOSEFILE
• LREADFILE
• LWRITEFILE
• LRUNFILE
• LRENAMEFILE
• LDELETEFILE
• LFORMAT
• LDEFRAG
Syntax:
@PJ L LOPENFI LE DEVI CE=f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME=f na me ACCESS=a c c e s s t ype
[ <CR>] <LF>
See Chapter 6: “Flash Memory and Disk” for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-87
parameters are noted in the description of each command.
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands
Parameter
Syntax
Description
a c c e s s t ype
ACCESS = a c c e s s t ype
One of the following access types must be specified when a file is opened:
RO Open for read only. The file must already exist on the specified
device.
WO Create a new file. If the file already exists, its contents will be
discarded and a new file will be created.
RW Open for reading and writing. The file must already exist.
AP Open for reading and writing, and position the file pointer to the end
of the file. The file must already exist.
Access types are case sensitive.
The LREADFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with an
a c c e s s t ype of RO, RW, or AP. The LWRITEFILE command is ignored if the
file was not opened with an a c c e s s t ype of WO, RW, or AP.
byt e c ount
LENGTH = byt e c ount
The amount of data in bytes to be read or written. The parameter is optional
for both the LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands.
If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LREADFILE command,
byt e c ount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START
location. If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LWRITEFILE
command, an @PJL END DATA command must be placed at the end of the
data. All data up to ‘@’ in @PJL END DATA is written to the file.
Note: The LWRITEFILE command requires that either the LENGTH
parameter or the @PJL END DATA command be specified, but not both.
If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is
assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-88
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter
Syntax
Description
f i l e de vi c e
DEVICE = f i l e de vi c e
File storage media. Case insensitive.
f l a s h
f l a s h1
di s k
di s k1
r om
The r om value is used for the LRUNFILE command only.
Note: The command is ignored if the device is not installed.
f l a s hde vi c e DEVICE = f l a s hde vi c e File storage media.
f l a s h
f l a s h1
f i l e na me
FILENAME = "fname"
“Fname” is comprised of a filename, a unique identifier for a file, and a
OLDFILENAME = "fname" filetype, which specifies the type of file. The format is
NEWFILENAME = "fname" f i l e na me . f i l e t ype .
The f i l e na me must be one of the following:
ma c r o I D
s ymbol s e t I D
f ont I D
PCL macros
PCL symbol sets
PCL fonts
a c t ua l f i l e na me data, Type 1 fonts, demo files
(case sensitive)
The f i l e t ype must be one of the following:
t 1
s Fnt 5
bFnt 5
MAC5
PostScript font
PCL scalable font
PCL bitmap font
PCL macro
da t a
User Data
t ype 1
de mo
PostScript font
Demo
p5s c a l a bl e
p5bi t ma p
p5ma c r o
p5s yms e t
ppds bm
xl ma c r o
PCL scalable font
PCL bitmap font
PCL macro
PCL symbol set
PPDS bitmap font
PCL XL user stream
All fname specifications must be enclosed in quotation marks and cannot
exceed 127 characters.
If the file is password-protected, the password must be provided in order to
unlock the file.
For additional information about passwords, see “File and Device Protection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-89
Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands (Continued)
Parameter
Syntax
Description
l oc a t i on
START = l oc a t i on
The location in the file to begin writing or reading. Use an integer that
represents an offset in bytes from the beginning of the file.
Optional for both LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands. If this parameter
is omitted from an LREADFILE command, a l oc a t i on of 0 (beginning of
the file) is assumed. If it is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command with an
a c c e s s t ype of RW, a l oc a t i on of 0 is also assumed.
If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the
LREADFILE command response will contain no file data. Similarly, an
LWRITEFILE command with an a c c e s s t ype of RW functions like an
LWRITEFILE command with an a c c e s s t ype of AP.
Note: If PostScript emulation is used to create the file on the device, it may
downloaded to flash through PostScript emulation, the f na me on the PJL
commands is " myf i l e . da t a " .
LOPENFILE Command
Use this command to open a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LOPENFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me "
ACCESS = a c c e s s t ype [ <CR>] <LF>
LCLOSEFILE Command
Use this command to close a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the
file doesn’t exist on the device or if the file is not open.
Syntax:
@PJ L LCLOSEFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me " [ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-90
LREADFILE Command
Use this command to read data from a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LREADFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me "
[ START = l oc a t i on] [ LENGTH = byt e c ount ] [ <CR>] <LF>
Response Syntax:
@PJ L LREADFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me "
START = l oc a t i on LENGTH = byt e c ount <CR><LF>
<r e que s t e d da t a f r om t he f i l e >@PJ L END DATA<CR><LF><FF>
Notes:
• The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations
are complete.
• The command is ignored if the file doesn’t exist on the device or has not
already been opened with LOPENFILE with an a c c e s s t ype of RO, RW, or AP.
• If the START = l oc a t i on parameter is omitted, location 0 (beginning of the
file) is assumed.
• If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size, the response
will contain no file data.
• If the LENGTH parameter is omitted, byt e c ount is assumed to be equal to
the entire file beginning at the START location.
• If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command, it is
assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-91
LWRITEFILE Command
Use this command to write data to a file on a storage device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LWRI TEFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me "
[ START = l oc a t i on] [ LENGTH = byt e c ount ] [ <CR>] <LF><da t a >
[ @PJ L END DATA] [ <CR>] <LF>
Notes:
• The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations
are complete.
• The command is ignored if the file doesn’t exist on the device. The command
is ignored if the file isn’t already open with a write a c c e s s t ype .
• If START = l oc a t i on is omitted on a file with an a c c e s s t ype of RW, location 0
is assumed.
• If START = l oc a t i on is greater than file size and the a c c e s s t ype is RW, it
positions the file pointer at the end of the file.
• If the LENGTH is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command, an @PJL END
DATA must be placed at the end of the data. All data up to ‘@’ in @PJL END
DATA is written to the file. The command requires either the LENGTH
parameter or the @PJL END DATA be specified, but not both.
LRUNFILE Command
Use this command to load and execute a file on a storage device. For example, use
this command to run the resident demo file or a demo file stored on flash or disk.
Syntax:
@PJ L LRUNFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me " [ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-92
LRENAMEFILE Command
Use this command to rename a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if
the filename specified as OLDFILENAME doesn’t exist on the device, or if the
filename specified as NEWFILENAME already exists on the device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LRENAMEFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e OLDFI LENAME = " f na me "
NEWFI LENAME = " f na me " [ <CR>] <LF>
LDELETEFILE Command
Use this command to delete a file on a storage device. The command is ignored if the
file doesn’t exist on the device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LDELETEFI LE DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e FI LENAME = " f na me " [ <CR>] <LF>
LFORMAT Command
Use this command to format a device for storage.
Syntax:
@PJ L LFORMAT DEVI CE = f i l e de vi c e [ <CR>] <LF>
LDEFRAG Command
Use this command to recover storage space on a flash device.
Syntax:
@PJ L LDEFRAG DEVI CE = f l a s hde vi c e [ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-93
File and Device Protection Commands
The following information applies to password protection.
• You can set both read/write and write passwords for a resource. If both
passwords are set, the read/write password has precedence over the write
password.
• If you attempt to password-protect a non-existing resource, the PJL
interpreter will return a warning (CODE = 25001).
• If a resource has already been password protected, the resource must be
“unlocked” before you can specify a different password for that resource.
• Several restrictions with passwords apply to flash due to the nature of the
technology:
— You can create/change passwords for the whole flash multiple times, but
each change uses up free space in the flash that can only be recovered by
reformatting the whole flash.
— You can create passwords for individual resources on the flash only once.
You can also delete this password once. If this is done, you must recreate
the resource before using the password feature again.
Protecting a File or Device
Use the DEFAULT command to set a password on the entire flash or disk or on an
individual macro or font in flash.
Password Protection for a File
LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for reading and writing.
LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for writing only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-94
Syntax:
@PJ L DEFAULT LRESOURCE: " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LRWLOCK=" pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
@PJ L DEFAULT LRESOURCE: " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LWLOCK=" pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
The filename used depends on whether you wish to put a password on a font or a
macro.
The filename for a font is a five digit ID from the print directory page (add zeros to the
left of the ID to fill the five digits) followed by a three digit instance number. The first
time a font is downloaded after a flash has been formatted, the instance number is 0.
Variables” on page 3-53. For example, to write password protect a PCL emulation
bitmapped font (filetype of p5bi t ma p) with an ID of 127, which has not been
downloaded since flash was formatted:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"f l a s h:00127000.p5bi t ma p"
LWLOCK="pa s s wor d"[<CR>]<LF>
To password protect a macro, the filename is the ID taken from the print directory
page, followed by the filetype. For example, to read/write password protect a
PCL emulation macro (filetype is p5ma c r o) saved to flash with an ID of 1023:
@PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE:"f l a s h: 1023. p5ma c r o"
LRWLOCK="pa s s wor d"[<CR>]<LF>
Note: If the filename is incorrect, the printer applies the password to the entire
device.
Password for an Entire Device
If you want to set a password on a device, not just a single file, omit the filename.
LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for reading and writing. LWLOCK
with DEFAULT specified locks a device for writing only.
Syntax:
@PJ L DEFAULT LRESOURCE: " de vi c e : " LRWLOCK=" pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
@PJ L DEFAULT LRESOURCE: " de vi c e : " LWLOCK=" pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-95
Unlocking a Protected File or Device
Use the LDECLARE command to specify a password so a protected file or device may
be accessed or “unlocked.” The LDECLARE command is only allowed within a JOB/
EOJ combination.
LRWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for reading and writing.
LWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for writing only. The file
or device must be re-locked using the LDELETEPASSWORD command after the job
is completed. The file or device is not automatically re-locked with the EOJ command.
Syntax:
@PJ L LDECLARE LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LRWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
@PJ L LDECLARE LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The f i l e na me is case
sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for PCL
macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the table
types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
LRWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" or LWLOCK = " pa s s wor d"
See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-52 for information about
values for LRWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" and LWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" parameters.
Note: This should be the same password that was defined in the DEFAULT
for an Entire Device” on page 3-94 for examples.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-96
Re-Locking a Protected File or Device
Use the LDELETEPASSWORD command to re-lock a password-protected file or
device that has been unlocked using the LDECLARE command.
If an LRESOURCE is not specified, all unlocked files or devices are re-locked.
Syntax:
@PJ L LDELETEPASSWORD [ LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " ] [ <CR>] <LF>
LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The f i l e na me is case
sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for PCL
macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the table
filetypes. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-97
Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job
The file or device unlocked by the execution of this command is automatically
re-locked upon execution of the EOJ command or by a printer language change.
Syntax:
@PJ L LDECLARE LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LRWLOCKJ = " pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
@PJ L LDECLARE LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
LWLOCKJ = " pa s s wor d" [ <CR>] <LF>
LRESOURCE : " de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype "
Values for "de vi c e : f i l e na me . f i l e t ype " are:
de vi c e
f l a s h, f l a s h1, di s k, or di s k1 (case insensitive)
f i l e na me
A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL
macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a
PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and
demo files as shown on the Directory. The f i l e na me is case
sensitive.
f i l e t ype
An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5ma c r o for PCL
macros or p5s yms e t for PCL symbol sets. See the table
types. The f i l e t ype is case sensitive.
LRWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" or LWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" Parameters
See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-52 for information about
values for LRWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" and LWLOCK = " pa s s wor d" parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL
3-98
Recovering Lost Passwords
Use the LQUERYSEED and LBYPASSPASSWORD commands to recover lost
passwords.
Syntax:
@PJ L LQUERYSEED[ <CR>] <LF>
@PJ L LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY = " ke y" [ <CR>] <LF>
Use the following steps to retrieve lost passwords:
1
Send the LQUERYSEED command to the printer by one of the host computer
interfaces.
This command causes a value, the “seed,” to display on the printer operator
panel, through MarkVision Professional or, if there isn’t an LCD panel, to print on
the Menu Settings Page. The value of the “seed” determines the ke y.
2
3
Obtain the ke y from the Lexmark Customer Support Center.
You must have the “seed” value.
Send the @PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD command to the printer by any port.
If the correct ke y is specified, a modified version of the directory is produced.
The directory indicates the appropriate passwords for the flash or disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-1
CHAPTER 4: PostScript Emulation
This section explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators in detail. For more
information, refer to the PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by
Adobe Systems, Inc.
Selecting PostScript Emulation
Using SmartSwitch
When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface, the printer
automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program.
The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages and all
interfaces. The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between
PostScript emulation and PCL emulation.
Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional
You may select PostScript emulation from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. To disable the automatic switching and have all input
interpreted as PostScript language, turn PCL SmartSwitch Off and set the printer
language default to PostScript emulation. See your printer documentation for
information on changing menu settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-2
Using Your Software Program
To select PostScript emulation, use the ENTER LANGUAGE command, which is a
Printer Job Language (PJL) command. For more information, see “ENTER
information about syntax and the use of PJL.
Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose all previously
downloaded fonts and macros, unless Resource Save is set to On or the
resources are stored in flash memory or on disk.
Table 4-1: Paper Sizes Supported
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Printer
Paper Sizes
Models
Literal Name
Size (mm)
Size (inches)
8.5 x 11.0
8.5 x 14.0
7.17 x 10.1
8.27 x 11.7
7.25 x 10.5
5.83 x 8.27
10.12 x 14.33
11.7 x 16.54
12.91 x 17.83
11 x 17
Size (points)
612 x 792
612 x 1008
516 x 729
595 x 842
522 x 756
419 x 595
729 x 1032
842 x 1191
930 x 1284
792 x 1224
1224 x 792
612 x 936
396 x 612
612 x 1020
842 x 1224
908 x 1584
842 x 2592
letter
215.9 x 279.4
215.9 x 355.6
182.0 x 257.0
210.0 x 297.0
184.2 x 266.7
148.0 x 210.0
257 x 364
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
2
legal
b51
a4
executivepage
a5
b4
a3
297 x 420
a3+
11x17
ledger
328 x 453
279.4 x 431.8
431.8 x 279.4
216 x 330
17 x 11
2
folio
8.5 x 13
statement
140 x 216
5.5 x 8.5
2
custom
215.9 x 355.6
297 x 431.8
320 x 559
8.5 x 14.0
11.7 x 17
custom
custom
12.6 x 22
custom
297 x 914
11.7 x 36
1
B5 is a Japanese Industry Standard (JIS) paper size. The same B5
designation is used by JIS and International Standards
Organization (ISO) for different paper sizes.
2
The Lexmark C510(n) supports this size media only with an
optional legal tray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-3
currentuniversalsize
— c ur r e nt uni ve r s a l s i z e i nt e ge r i nt e ge r i nt e ge r ( s t r i ng)
queries the current settings for the Universal paper size. Three i nt e ge r s and
one s t r i ng are returned on the stack:
Universal Width
Universal Height
Universal Feed Direction
Custom Universal Prompt String
Error: stackoverflow
ignoresize
— i gnor e s i z e i nt e ge r
queries whether or not text is being oriented based on page size.
An i nt e ge r value is returned on the stack:
0
1
2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size
treat the page size as an envelope
treat the page size as paper
Error: stackoverflow
setignoresize
i nt e ge r s e t i gnor e s i z e —
overrides the automatic page orientation selected by the printer to support
custom media sizes. This operator determines whether or not to adjust the text
based on the page size.
i nt e ge r value may be:
0
1
2
perform automatic orientation of text based on page size (default)
treat the page size as an envelope
treat the page size as paper
A value set by this operator takes effect on a subsequent setpagedevice only if
PageSize Policy is set to 7.
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-4
setuniversalsize
— i nt e ge r i nt e ge r i nt e ge r ( s t r i ng) s e t uni ve r s a l s i z e
changes the current settings for the Universal paper size. Each parameter on the
stack indicates:
Universal Width
Universal Height
Universal Feed Direction
0 short edge
minimum to maximum width in points
minimum to maximum height in points
1 long edge
Custom Universal Prompt String
String must be 16 characters or less.
Error: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Paper Tray Support
Tray Operators” on page 4-6, it performs the actions listed as follows. This paper tray
selection process ends as soon as a suitable paper source is chosen and paper is fed
from this tray.
• The printer checks the value of manualfeed in statusdict and the
ManualFeed page device parameter. If either one is true, the printer sends a
message to load the requested size in the manual feed tray or multipurpose
feeder.
• The PageSize Policy is set to 0 by means of setpagedevice.
• The printer checks the paper size loaded in the current active source to
determine if it matches the requested size. If the sizes match, the paper is fed
from the active source.
Note: The current active tray is the last source that was selected from the
printer operator panel or by the printer language.
• If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match,
the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-5
• If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following
search order is used:
— Tray 1
— Tray 2
— Tray 3
— Multipurpose Feeder
— Tray 4
— Tray 5
• If the requested size cannot be located in any automatic source, a
configurationerror is issued and the job is flushed.
For printers that support automatic duplexing:
• Automatic duplexing is not supported for custom-size paper or for envelopes
in the multipurpose feeder. Automatic duplexing is supported from the
multipurpose feeder for all other papers.
• If the paper source is changed before the back side of a duplexed page prints,
a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the information for
the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a page sent from the
new paper source.
When these operators are used, it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript
emulation sequence:
<< / Pa ge Si z e [ x y] / I ma gi ngBBox nul l / Pol i c i e s << / Pa ge Si z e 0>> >>
s e t pa ge de vi c e
where x y are the PageSize in points.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-6
Table 4-2: Tray Selected with Tray Operators
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Models
ꢀ Not Supported
Tray Selected
Operator
a3tray
(Corresponding image size is set)
tray with A3 size paper
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
a4tray
tray with A4 size paper
a5tray
tray with A5 size paper
b4tray
tray with B4 size paper
b5tray
tray with B5 size paper
customtray
tray with custom size paper
executivetray tray with executive size paper
foliotray
tray with folio size paper
tray with ledger size paper
tray with legal size paper
tray with letter size paper
ledgertray
legaltray
lettertray
statementtray tray with statement size paper
11x17tray tray with 11 x 17 size paper
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-7
manualfeed
/ ma nua l f e e d bool e a n de f
in statusdict indicates if a manual feed source has been selected. The boolean
value can be:
t r ue
prints from a manual feed source (default)
prints from an automatic feed source
f a l s e
This boolean key can be redefined to affect manual feed for the current job.
If the value of the manualfeed operator or the ManualFeed page device
parameter is t r ue when showpage or copypage is executed, the page is fed
manually. If both have a value of f a l s e when showpage or copypage is
executed, the page is fed from an automatic source. These two values are
independent of each other.
Note: If manualfeed is redefined between printing the front and back page of
a duplexed page, the information for the front and back pages is printed on
the same page.
Error: stackoverflow
papertray
— pa pe r t r a y i nt e ge r
queries the paper tray that is currently selected. An i nt e ge r is returned on the
stack indicating which paper tray is currently in use. Valid i nt e ge r s are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Tray 1
Tray 2
Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Tray 3
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-8
setpapertray
i nt e ge r s e t pa pe r t r a y —
changes the active paper source for the next page through the end of job by
setting the PageSize entry in the page device to the size loaded in the selected
source and by setting MediaPosition to the selected source. This operator
executes a setpagedevice.
The PageSize Policy page device parameter is not altered by this operator.
Use the following i nt e ge r s to set the paper tray:
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Tray 1
Tray 2
Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Tray 3
Multipurpose Feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
Notes:
• If the Manual Paper or Manual Envelope source is selected, the Manual-
Feed page device parameter is set to t r ue .
• A rangecheck error is returned if a paper source that is not installed is
selected.
• If a setpapertray operator is issued for the back of a duplexed page, the
printer ejects a blank back page, changes the paper source, and prints the
information for the back side of the page on the front side of a page from
the new paper source.
The setting returns to the user default setting for the Paper Source menu item at
the end of the print job.
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-9
Envelope Size Support
operators change the image size, but do not change the active paper source.
Therefore, when these operators are used, part of the image may be clipped.
When these literal names are used as operators, it is equivalent to executing the
following PostScript emulation sequence. The following example uses a 3.875 x 7.5
envelope.
<</ Pol i c i e s <</ Pa ge Si z e 7>> / Pa ge Si z e [ 279 540] >> >>s e t pa ge de vi c e
Table 4-3: Envelope Sizes Supported
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Printer
Models
Envelope Sizes
Size
Literal Name
Size (mm)
Size (inches) (points)
3.875x7.5envelope
98.4 x 190.5
3.875 x 7.5
3.875 x 8.875
4.125 x 9.5
4.33 x 8.66
6.38 x 9.01
6.93 x 9.84
[279 540]
[279 639]
[297 684]
[312 624]
[459 649]
[499 708]
[612 996]
[841 842]
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
3.875x8.875envelope 98.4 x 225.4
4.125x9.5envelope
110x220envelope
162x229envelope
176x250envelope
104.8 x 241.3
110 x 220
162 x 229
176 x 250
Other
1
otherenvelope
otherenvelope
Other
1
For other envelopes, the page is formatted to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14
in.) unless a size is specified by your software program.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-10
operators.
Table 4-4: Literal Names Supported
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Printer
Literal Names
Models
Literal Name
monarcenvelope
com10envelope
dlenvelope
Compatible Literal Name
3.875x7.5envelope
4.125x9.5envelope
110x220envelope
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
c5envelope
162x229envelope
b5envelope
176x250envelope
Note: Duplexing is not supported on any envelope size. If duplex printing is
requested and one of the envelope size operators is sent to the printer,
duplexing is suspended until a paper size is requested that is supported for
duplex printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-11
Envelope Tray Support
If manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter are f a l s e
when the printer receives one of the envelopetray operators listed in
• Sets the PageSize Policy to 0.
• Checks the active source to see if it matches the requested envelope size. If
the sizes match, the envelope is fed from the active source.
Note: The active source is the last source selected from the printer operator
panel or data stream.
• If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match,
the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
• If the requested media size is not found by the previous search, the following
search order is used:
— Envelope Feeder
— Multipurpose Feeder
• If the requested size and type are not available from any automatic source,
you are prompted to load the requested envelope size and type in the manual
feed source.
• If the size is still not available, a configurationerror is issued and the print
job is flushed.
If manualfeed or ManualFeed is t r ue , the printer prompts you to load the requested
size manually. If no manual feed exists on the printer, a rangecheck error message is
generated.
The envelope tray the printer selects when it receives an envelopetray operator is
PostScript emulation sequence:
<</PageSize [x y] /ImagingBBox null /Policies<</PageSize 0>> >>
setpagedevice
where x y are the PageSize in points.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-12
Table 4-5: Envelopetray Operator Selections
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Printer
Models
Tray Operators
Tray Selected (Corresponding image size
is set)
Operator
110x220envelopetray
dlenvelopetray
tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes
tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes
tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes
tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes
tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes
tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes
tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes
tray with 3.875 x 7.5 size envelopes
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
162x229envelopetray
c5envelopetray
176x250envelopetray
b5envelopetray
3.875x7.5envelopetray
monarcenvelopetray
3.875x8.875envelopetray tray with 3.875 x 8.875 size envelopes
4.125x9.5envelopetray
com10envelopetray
otherenvelopetray
tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes
tray with 4.125 x 9.5 size envelopes
tray with other size envelopes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-13
Supplemental Operator Summary
appletalktype
— a ppl e t a l kt ype ( s t r i ng)
in statusdict, this string reflects the current value of the LocalTalkType device
parameter from the %LocalTalk% device. The default s t r i ng is La s e r Wr i t e r . To
change the type portion (appletalktype) of the AppleTalk network name and
redefine the string, execute the following:
/appletalktype ( s t r i ng) def
When you redefine a string inside the normal server loop, it is reset to the default
value at the end of the print job. When you define it outside the normal server
loop, it is reset to the default value when the printer is switched to a printer
language other than PostScript emulation or when a power-on reset occurs.
Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, typecheck
buildtime
— bui l dt i me i nt e ge r
returns the BuildTime system parameter, which is a timestamp that identifies
the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter.
Error: stackoverflow
byteorder
byt e or de r bool e a n
returns a boolean on the stack with the same value as the system parameter
ByteOrder. Indicates the printer microprocessor native byte order. The boolean
values indicate:
t r ue
low-order byte first
high-order byte first
f a l s e
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-14
checkpassword
i nt e ge r c he c kpa s s wor d or
( s t r i ng) c he c kpa s s wor d
checks the passwords for both the SystemParamsPassword system parameter
and the StartJobPassword system parameter stored in the printer.
If the i nt e ge r form is used, the integer is converted into a string before the
password check occurs. A bool e a n is returned on the stack to indicate if the
specified password matches either password. The boolean value can be:
t r ue
correct password
f a l s e
incorrect password
After the bool e a n is returned, the printer waits 1 second before it continues
processing.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
Note: The password is defined as a 4-byte number.
currentfilenameextend
c ur r e nt f i l e na me e xt e nd bool e a n
returns a boolean on the stack to indicate whether the extension should be
automatically added to any filename. The boolean value is either:
t r ue
adds the extension
f a l s e
does not add the extension
Error: stackoverflow
currentmanualduplexmode
i nt e ge r c ur r e nt ma nua l dupl e xmode
queries the current value of the manual duplex mode. An integer is returned on
the stack:
0
1
2
current job manual duplex mode is no manual duplex
current job manual duplex mode is printing first sides of job
current job manual duplex mode is printing second sides of job
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-15
defaulttimeouts
— de f a ul t t i me out s j ob ma nua l f e e d wa i t
queries the user default settings of all timeouts. Three integers are returned on
the stack:
• JobTimeout system parameter
0
disabled (default)
15. . . 65535 seconds
• ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter
0
disabled
1. . . 65535 seconds (default is device dependent)
• WaitTimeout system parameter
0
disabled
15. . . 65535 seconds (default is 40 seconds)
Error: stackoverflow
deletefile
f i l e na me de l e t e f i l e
deletes the specified file from the disk. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-16
devcontrol
s t r i ng i nt e ge r de vc ont r ol bool e a n
allows a host computer utility to manage resources on the flash or disk. It
requires a string device name parameter, an integer command name parameter,
and two command argument parameters. The device control operator performs
a specified command on the specified device. The return values on the stack
indicate:
t r ue
the command is successful
f a l s e
the command is unsuccessful and returns an error code
Table 4-6: devcontrol Operator Parameters
Integer Command
Name Parameter
Argument Parameter
null null
Description
1
Park disk heads
5
file null
Make contiguous flash file
Set description of file
8
filename description
password null
password null
filename password
filename password
password null
password null
filename password
filename password
null null
9
Set device read/write password
Set device write password
Set file read/write password
Set file write password
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
27
Declare device read/write password
Declare device write password
Declare file read/write password
Declare file write password
Reset device password list
Reset file password list
null null
devicename password
filename password
devicename null
filename null
null null
Get device password
Get file password
Determine if device password is properly declared
Determine if file password is properly declared
Scan for bad block
null null
Abort bad block scan
null null
Quick bad block scan
null null
Flush the disk cache
file null
Be quiet when writing to disk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-17
Table 4-7: Unsuccessful devcontrol Parameter Error Codes
Code
1
Meaning
File system access has not been initialized
Could not allocate file descriptor
Some invalid argument was passed
No such device
2
3
4
5
Invalid access to file requested
Argument too large (filename, buffer)
Invalid file descriptor or filename
Catch all error or device error
Unable to allocate memory for buffer, data structure
Device busy
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Device not currently mounted
Attempt to perform illegal IO operation
No space to update or create file
Major change in file system for findnext() to function properly
Corrupted file system on device
Device already mounted
Could not initialize file system
Device not mounted
No file entry located
Bad file system on device
Password required
Aborted by callback
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, typecheck
devdismount
de vi c e de vdi s mount
—
dismounts the specified device by setting the Mounted device parameter for the
specified device to f a l s e . This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs when an invalid device name is
used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-18
devforall
pr oc s c r a t c hs t r i ng de vf or a l l
—
executes the specified pr oc procedure for each storage device after pushing a
substring on the stack that is the portion of the scratch string containing the
device name. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow,
typecheck, undefined
devformat
de vi c e na me pa ge s a c t i on de vf or ma t
—
formats (erases all data from) the specified device. This operator is in
systemdict.
pa ge s
Sets the LogicalSize device parameter for the specified device:
0
entire device is formatted
1, 2, 3
an ioerror occurs
a c t i on 1 is added to the action argument. The result is used for the
InitializeAction device parameter for the same device.
A devformat on a flash device formats the entire device regardless of the
LogicalSize specified.
Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, rangecheck, stackunderflow,
typecheck, undefined, undefinedfilename
Note: An invalidaccess error occurs if devformat is not executed through
exitserver or startjob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-19
devmount
de vi c e de vmount bool e a n
sets the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to t r ue . It also
returns the value of the Mounted device parameter for the specified device. This
operator is in systemdict.
The boolean values indicate:
t r ue
device successfully mounted, or was already mounted
device not mounted
f a l s e
If a device with the specified device name is not installed, an
undefinedfilename error occurs.
This operator may change the search order. See “Device Search Order” on
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, undefinedfilename
devstatus
de vi c e na me de vs t a t us f a l s e or
de vi c e na me de vs t a t us s e a r c ha bl e wr i t e a bl e ha s na me s mount e d r e mova bl e
s e a r c hor de r f r e e s i z e t r ue
returns on the stack the status of a specified device. This operator is in
systemdict. A value of f a l s e is returned if the device is not present. If the
device is present, five boolean values and three integers (see the following
description) followed by a value of t r ue are returned.
The five boolean values are:
s e a r c ha bl e
t r ue , if the device is included in the search order and is to be searched for
the file operators that do not specify a device name. Same as the value of
the Searchable device parameter from the specified IODevice.
wr i t e a bl e
t r ue , if the device can be written to. This value is the same as the Writeable
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
ha s na me s
t r ue , if the device supports named files. This value is the same as the
HasNames device parameter from the specified IODevice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-20
mount e d
t r ue , if the device is mounted. This value is the same as the Mounted
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
r e mova bl e
t r ue , if the device is removable and must be mounted before it is
referenced. This value is the same as the Removable device parameter
from the specified IODevice.
The three integers are:
s e a r c hor de r
The position in the search order. This value is the same as the SearchOrder
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
f r e e
The number of free bytes on the device. This value is the same as the Free
device parameter from the specified IODevice.
s i z e
The total number of bytes on the device. This value is the same as the
LogicalSize device parameter from the specified IODevice.
Error: typecheck
diskonline
— di s konl i ne bool e a n
returns the value of the Writeable device parameter (which is a boolean) for the
%disk1% IODevice.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
(%disk1%) currentdevparams /Writeable get
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-21
diskstatus
— di s ks t a t us f r e e l ogi c a l s i z e
returns on the stack the following two integers:
• Number of pages that are free on the optional disk. The value of the Free
device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice.
• Total number of pages (1024 bytes) that are on the optional disk. The value
of the LogicalSize device parameter from the %disk1% IODevice.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
(%disk1%) currentdevparams dup /Free get exch /LogicalSize get
Error: stackoverflow
displayoperatormsg
( s t r i ng) di s pl a yope r a t or ms g
sets a custom paper message. The string parameter is used as a prompt string
when a page prints. The s t r i ng value can be any string up to 16 characters. The
string is cleared at the end of a print job.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
doidlefonts
— doi dl e f ont s f a l s e
returns a constant boolean value of f a l s e .
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-22
dojamrecovery
— doj a mr e c ove r y bool e a n
queries the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. A boolean value
is returned on the stack:
t r ue
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On) (default)
f a l s e
do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off)
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /ExitJamRecovery get
Error: stackoverflow
doprinterrors
— dopr i nt e r r or s bool e a n
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoPrintErrors.
It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The
DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the doprinterrors
operator to be present.
Error: stackoverflow
doret
— dor e t i nt e ge r
returns the PQET setting for the current print job. An integer value is returned on
the stack:
0
1
Off
On
Note: For printers that do not support PQET, doret returns a 0.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /PostRenderingEnhanceDetails get /REValue get
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-23
dostartpage
— dos t a r t pa ge bool e a n
returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoStartPage.
The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the compatibility
operator dostartpage to be present.
Error: stackoverflow
dosysstart
— dos ys s t a r t bool e a n
returns the current value of the StartupMode system parameter. A boolean
value is returned:
t r ue
StartupMode set to 1 or 11
f a l s e
StartupMode other than 1 or 11
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemsparams /StartupMode get
Error: stackoverflow
duplexer
— dupl e xe r bool e a n
queries if a duplex unit is installed. A boolean value is returned on the stack:
t r ue
duplex unit is installed
f a l s e
duplex unit is not installed
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always f a l s e .
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-24
duplexmode
— dupl e xmode bool e a n
queries the current value for the Duplex page device parameter.
t r ue
printing mode is duplex
printing mode is simplex
f a l s e
Note: For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always f a l s e .
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /Duplex get
Error: stackoverflow
enginesync
— e ngi ne s ync bool e a n
indicates if the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a
Ctrl-D to the host computer.
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-25
file
f i l e na me a c c e s s f i l e f i l e
creates a file object with specified filename and access. The a c c e s s values are:
r
open the file for reading only
w
create a file if one does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite it if
it does exist. File is opened for writing only.
a
create a file if one does not already exist or append it if it does exist.
File is opened for writing only.
r +
w+
a +
open the file for reading and writing. An undefinedfilename error
occurs if the file does not exist.
create a file if it does not already exist, or truncate and overwrite if it
does exist. File is opened for reading and writing.
create a file if it does not exist or append it if it does exist. File is
opened for reading and writing.
This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
filenameforall
pa t t e r n pr oc s c r a t c hs t r i ng f i l e name f or a l l
lists all the files with names that match a specified pattern string, copies the
filename for each of these files into a specified scratch string, and calls a
specified pr oc procedure. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
fileposition
f i l e f i l epos i t i on pos i t i on
indicates the current position on an open file. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-26
firstside
— f i r s t s i de bool e a n
indicates whether the current imaging area is on the front side of the page.
t r ue
front side is currently being imaged
back side is currently being imaged
f a l s e
Error: stackoverflow
fontnonzerowinding
— bool e a n f ont nonz e r owi ndi ng
sets the winding rule for Type 1 fonts. No query operation is performed since the
winding rule is reset to t r ue at the beginning of each print job. The boolean
value can be:
t r ue
non-zero winding used by the interpreter
even or odd winding rule used by interpreter
f a l s e
Error: stackoverflow
hardwareiomode
— ha r dwa r e i omode bool e a n
queries the user default setting of the Parallel Protocol menu item. This operator
returns the value of the Parallel Protocol, either Standard or Fastbytes. An
i nt e ge r value is returned on the stack:
1
2
Parallel Fastbytes Off (Standard)
Parallel Fastbytes On (Fastbytes)
Error: stackoverflow
idlefonts
— i dl e f ont s ma r k
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and returns a mark on the stack.
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-27
ignoresize
initializedisk
pa ge s a c t i on i ni t i a l i z e di s k —
initializes the disk with the page count and action as integer arguments. The
arguments set the (%disk1%) IO device parameters as follows:
• LogicalSize parameter is set to pa ge s .
• If a value of 0 is set as pa ge s , the entire disk is formatted.
• If a value of 1, 2, or 3 is set as pa ge s , an ioerror is generated.
• InitializeAction parameter is set to a c t i on plus 1.
Errors: invalidaccess, ioerror, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
jobname
— j obna me ( s t r i ng)
identifies each print job selection. This string in statusdict queries and changes
the current setting of the JobName user parameter. Originally, j obna me is set to
null.
• To query jobname: j obna me or
c ur r e nt us e r pa r a ms / J obNa me ge t .
A string indicating the job name is returned on the stack.
• To change jobname: / j obna me ( s t r i ng) de f or
<< / J obNa me ( s t r i ng) >> s e t us e r pa r a ms
where s t r i ng is the new job name.
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-28
jobsource
— j obs our c e ( s t r i ng)
indicates the current value of the CurInputDevice system parameter. A string is
returned on the stack indicating the job source. Valid values are:
%LocalTalk%
%SerialA%
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
%ParallelA%
%ParallelB%
%ParallelC%
%ParallelD%
%IR_A%
%IR_B%
%IR_C%
%IR_D%
%USB_A%
%USB_B%
%USB_C%
%USB_D%
%EtherTalkB%
%EtherTalkC%
%EtherTalkD%
%TokenTalkB%
%TokenTalkC%
%TokenTalkD%
%LexLinkB%
%LexLinkC%
%LexLinkD%
%PrintServerB%
%PrintServerC%
%PrintServerD%
%RemotePrinterB%
%RemotePrinterC%
%RemotePrinterD%
%AppSocketB%
%AppSocketC%
%AppSocketD%
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-29
%LPR_B%
%LPR_C%
%LPR_D%
%UnknownDevice%
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /CurInputDevice get
Error: stackoverflow
jobtimeout
— j obt i me out i nt e ge r
queries the current user default setting for the JobTimeout parameter. An
integer is returned on the stack:
0
disabled
15. . . 65355 seconds
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentuserparams /JobTimeout get
Error: stackoverflow
manualfeed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-30
manualfeedtimeout
/ ma nua l f e e dt i me out i nt e ge r de f
is an integer key in statusdict that works with the ManualFeedTimeout page
device parameter to determine the manualfeed timeout for a given page.
If during a print job, ma nua l f e e dt i me out is defined as an integer value in
statusdict, that value is used instead of the ManualFeedTimeout page device
parameter.
The value of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter and
manualfeedtimeout key in statusdict are independent of each other; the value
of one does not affect the value of the other.
0
disabled
1. . . 65355 seconds
An undefined error results if manualfeedtimeout is queried before the value is
set.
Errors: stackoverflow, undefined
newsheet
— ne ws he e t
—
causes the current page to start on the front side of a new sheet.
Error: none
pagecount
— pa ge c ount i nt e ge r
queries the value of the PageCount system parameter. An integer is returned on
the stack indicating the current page count.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /PageCount get
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-31
pagesprinted
-
pa ge s pr i nt e d
queries the number of pages of the current job submitted by the PostScript
interpreter to the printer.
Error: stackoverflow
papertray
printername
( s t r i ng) pr i nt e r na me ( s ubs t r i ng)
returns the value of the PrinterName system parameter that is defined by the
s e t pr i nt e r na me operator. The value of the string defines the printer name. A
maximum of 32 characters are returned on the stack.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /PrinterName get
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
product
— pr oduc t ( s t r i ng)
queries the name of the product that is defined in statusdict. A string is returned
on the stack indicating the name of the product. The product string in
systemdict cannot be changed.
To change this product string in statusdict:
/product ( s t r i ng) def
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-32
PS2fonts
-
PS2f ont s
redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs
and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2. The font names in parentheses are the
equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names.
Antique Olive
(Antique Olive Roman)
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
(Letter Gothic Slanted)
Univers Bold
Error: none
PS3fonts
-
PS3f ont s
restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3.
Error: none
quiet
— qui e t i nt e ge r
queries the PowerSave page device parameter. An integer is returned on the
stack:
0
Power Saver is Off
1 to 120 or 1 t o 240 (Model specific)
Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before
Power Saver is invoked.
Power Saver reduces power consumption when the printer is idle. When qui e t is
enabled, it takes longer to print the first page after the printer has been idle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-33
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy
Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /PowerSave get
Error: stackoverflow
ramsize
— r a ms i z e i nt e ge r
queries the current setting of the RamSize system parameter. An integer is
returned on the stack showing total RAM in bytes.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentsystemparams /RamSize get
Error: stackoverflow
realformat
— r e a l f or ma t bool e a n
returns a boolean with the same value as the RealFormat system parameter. It
indicates the printer microprocessor native real number representation. A query
determines if the printer real number representation matches the application real
number representation and compensates if necessary.
Error: stackoverflow
renamefile
ol df i l e na me ne wf i l e na me r e na me f i l e
renames the oldfilename to the newfilename. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: invalidfileaccess, ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck,
undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-34
resolution
— r e s ol ut i on i nt e ge r
queries the resolution for the current print job. An integer is returned on the
stack:
300 300 dpi is set to On
600 600 dpi is set to On
1200 1200 dpi is set to On
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /HWResolution get 0 get
Error: stackoverflow
revision
— r e vi s i on i nt e ge r
queries the Revision system parameter. An integer is returned on the stack to
indicate the revision level.
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-35
sccbatch
c ha nne l s c c ba t c h ba ud opt i on
returns the user default settings for serial communication parameters.
c ha nne l has the following valid integer values:
9
25
If only one serial interface port is available on the printer, both 9 and 25 return
the same values. Baud and option values are returned on the stack.
ba ud returns the value of the Baud menu item.
opt i on returns an 8 bit value as defined in the following illustration:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Flow Control
Data Style
Parity
Stop Bits
Stop Bits
This bit is always set to zero.
Data Style
01
11
7 data bits
8 data bits
Flow Control
000 XON/XOFF
001 DTR/DSR
101 DTR
110 XON/XOFF/DTR
111 XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Parity
00
ignore
odd
01
10
11
even
none
Errors: rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-36
sccinteractive
c ha nne l s c c i nt e r a c t i ve ba ud opt i ons
provided for parsing compatibility purposes. A value of 0 is returned.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackoverflow, stackunderflow,
typecheck
setcoverpage
bool e a n s e t c ove r pa ge —
specifies a cover page for a fax job. The default value is f a l s e .
The bool e a n values indicate:
t r ue
the current page that is processing is moved to the first page of the
current fax job
f a l s e
the current page that is processing is unaffected
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdefaulttimeouts
j ob ma nua l f e e d wa i t s e t de f a ul t t i me out s —
changes the values for all timeouts. Valid values are:
JobTimeout system parameter
0
disabled
15. . . 65355 seconds
ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter
0
disabled
1. . . 65355 seconds
WaitTimeout system parameter
0
disabled
15. . . 65355 seconds
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-37
setdoidlefonts
bool e a n s e t doi dl e f ont s —
is parsed and discarded. A boolean value is required.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setdojamrecovery
bool e a n s e t doj a mr e c ove r y —
changes the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item. The changes
are not effective until the end of the print job.
The bool e a n values indicate:
t r ue
reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to On)
do not reprint jammed page (Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto
[model dependent])
f a l s e
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
%Go into exitserver or startjob context
<< /ExitJamRecovery boolean >> setpagedevice
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdoprinterrors
bool e a n s e t dopr i nt e r r or s
sets the system parameter DoPrintErrors to the value of bool e a n. It also
indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting. The
DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the setdoprinterrors
operator to be present.
The bool e a n values indicate:
t r ue
Print PS Error is set to On
f a l s e
Print PS Error is set to Off
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-38
setdoret
i nt e ge r s e t dor e t
—
changes the PQET setting for the next page through the end of the print job.
The integer values allowed are:
0
1
2
3
4
turn PQET Off
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
turn PQET On
The value you select for PQET returns to the user default setting when the print
job is finished.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<<//PostRenderingEnhanceDetails << /REValue integer >> >>
setpagedevice
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setdostartpage
bool e a n s e t dos t a r t pa ge
sets the DoStartPage system parameter to the value of bool e a n. The
DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the setdostartpage
operator to be present. For more information, see “DoStartPage” on page 4-67.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-39
setdosysstart
bool e a n s e t dos ys s t a r t
—
modifies the value of the StartupMode system parameter.
t r ue
StartupMode set to 1
f a l s e
StartupMode set to 0 (default)
• If t r ue , the printer executes a Sys/Start file from flash or disk when the
PostScript emulation interpreter is initialized. If no flash or disk is installed,
no action occurs.
• If a Sys/Start file is on both flash and disk, the search order for the devices
determines which one is executed.
• If f a l s e , the printer does not execute a Sys/Start file.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setduplexmode
bool e a n s e t dupl e xmode —
sets the value of the Duplex page device parameter for the current print job.
t r ue
sets printing mode to duplex
sets printing mode to simplex
f a l s e
At the start of the next print job, the value is reset to the user default setting.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /Duplex boolean >> setpagedevice
Errors: configurationerror, stackunderflow, typecheck
Notes:
• If simplex printing is requested between the front side and back side of a
sheet, a blank back side is printed and information for the back side is
printed on the front side of the next sheet.
• For printers that do not support duplexing, this value is always set to f a l s e .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-40
setenginesync
bool e a n s e t e ngi ne s ync —
changes the setting that indicates whether the printer waits for the last page of a
job to print before returning a Ctrl-D to the host computer.
The boolean values indicate:
t r ue
printer waits for the last page of the job to print
f a l s e
printer does not wait for the last page of the job to print
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setethernetaddress
s t r i ng s e t e t he r ne t a ddr e s s
sets the EthernetAddress parameter in the EtherTalk communication
parameter set. The EthernetAddress parameter is the Ethernet address of the
Ethernet internal print server (also called an internal network adapter or INA).
The string value can be any string up to 17 characters.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
setfilenameextend
bool e a n s e t f i l e na me e xt e nd
sets whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename.
t r ue
adds the extension
f a l s e
does not add the extension
The default setting is t r ue .
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-41
setfileposition
f i l e pos i t i on s e t f i l e pos i t i on
moves the read pointer in an open file to the new specified file position. This is
defined as the number of bytes from the start of the file. The next read operation
starts at the new file position. This operator is in systemdict.
Errors: ioerror, stackunderflow, typecheck, undefinedfilename
Note: An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist.
sethardwareiomode
i nt e ge r s e t ha r dwa r e i omode —
is parsed and discarded. In addition, one integer is removed from the stack. It
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039.
Errors: invalidaccess, stackunderflow, typecheck
setidlefonts
ma r k. . . s e t i l de f ont s —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and pulls items from the stack until a mark is reached.
Error: unmatchedmark
setignoresize
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-42
setjobtimeout
i nt e ge r s e t j obt i me out
—
changes the value of the JobTimeout user parameter for the next page through
the end of the print job. Valid integers are:
0
disabled
15. . . 65355 seconds
The value returns to the JobTimeout system parameter setting at the end of the
print job.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<</JobTimeout integer >> setuserparams
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setmanualduplexmode
i nt s e t ma nua l dupl e xmode
changes the current job’s setting of manualduplexmode. Valid int values are:
0
1
2
no manual duplexing
printing the first sides of the job
printing the second sides of the job.
When printing second sides of the job is specified, a load manual duplex side 2
operator intervention condition will occur after the last page of the first sides is
printed, and prior to the first page of the second sides being printed. While
printing the second sides the printer’s available paper sources are restricted to
the automatic tray (tray1) and the manual paper feeder for the remainder of the
job or until the manual duplex mode value is changed.
Error: stackunderflow, typecheck
setpapertray
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-43
setprintername
s t r i ng s e t pr i nt e r na me —
changes the PrinterName system parameter to the value of the s t r i ng. The
string value can be any string up to 32 characters.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /PrinterName ( s t r i ng) >> setsystemparams
Errors: invalidaccess, limitcheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setquiet
i nt e ge r s e t qui e t
—
changes the user default setting of the PowerSave page device parameter.
The following integers are valid:
0
Power Saver Off
1 to 120 or 1 to 240 (Model specific)
Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before
Power Saver is invoked.
Any changes made by this operator are not active until the end of the print job.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as
Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
%Go into exitserver or startjob context
<< /PowerSave integer >> setpagedevice
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-44
setresolution
i nt e ge r s e t r e s ol ut i on —
changes the resolution for the current print job and discards unprinted data. See
your printer documentation for a list of supported resolutions. The following
integers are valid:
300
600
300 dpi is set to On
600 dpi is set to On
1200 dpi is set to On
1200
Notes:
• For some printers, the resolution value returns to the user default setting for
the Print Resolution menu item at the end of the print job.
• The printer waits for the paper path to clear before changing the resolution.
• If the resolution is changed for the back side of a duplexed sheet, the printer
ejects a blank back page, changes the resolution, and prints the information
for the page where the resolution was changed on the front side of the next
sheet.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /HWResolution [xres yres] >> setpagedevice
where xr e s = yr e s .
Errors: rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsccbatch
i nt e ge r i nt e ge r i nt e ge r s e t s c c ba t c h —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded.
Error: stackunderflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-45
setsccinteractive
c ha nne l ba ud opt i ons s e t s c c i nt e r a c t i ve
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded.
Errors: invalidaccess, rangecheck, stackunderflow, typecheck
setsoftwareiomode
i nt e ge r s e t s of t wa r e i omode —
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed, and an integer is removed from the stack and discarded.
This command validates that the integer value provided is an Adobe-supported
value of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 100, and then discards the operator and value.
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck, invalidaccess, rangecheck
settumble
bool e a n s e t t umbl e —
sets the value of the Tumble page device parameter for the current print job.
t r ue
sets the tumble setting to short-edge binding (back side of the
duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side)
sets the tumble setting to long-edge binding (back side of the
duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front) (default)
f a l s e
No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed.
Notes:
• At the start of the next print job, the setting for tumble is reset to the user
default setting for the Duplex Bind menu item.
• If tumble is changed between the printing of a front and back side of a
duplexed sheet, a blank back side is not ejected.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
<< /Tumble bool e a n >> setpagedevice
Errors: stackunderflow, typecheck
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-46
setuserdiskpercent
i nt e ge r s e t us e r di s kpe r c e nt
—
removes an integer from the stack and discards it.
Errors: stackunderflow, rangecheck, invalidaccess, typecheck
softwareiomode
— s of t wa r e i omode 0
supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019, 4029, and 4039. It is
parsed and returns a 0 (zero, Binary Mode Off) on the stack.
Software IO mode defines the data stream you are using.
Errors: stackoverflow, stackunderflow
tumble
— t umbl e bool e a n
returns the current value of the Tumble page device parameter.
t r ue
the back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to
the front side (short-edge binding)
f a l s e
the back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation
as the front side (long-edge binding) (default)
Note: No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed.
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentpagedevice /Tumble get
Errors: stackunderflow, stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-47
userdiskpercent
— us e r di s kper c e nt
0
returns a 0 (zero) on the stack.
Errors: stackoverflow, invalidaccess
waittimeout
— wa i t t i me out i nt e ge r
queries the current value for the WaitTimeout user parameter. An integer is
returned on the stack:
0
disabled
15. . . 65355 seconds
This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation
sequence:
currentuserparams /WaitTimeout get
Error: stackoverflow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-48
Page Device Parameters
In addition to the page device parameters described in Section 4.11 of the PostScript
Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc., the following
page device parameters are used by setpagedevice and currentpagedevice.
Certain parameters, such as Policies, Priority, and ManualFeed are listed here since
Language Reference Manual (Third Edition) by Adobe Systems, Inc.
To determine which parameters and default values your printer supports, see
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
BeginPage
procedure
Executes at the beginning of each page and returns an integer which indicates
how many times showpage has been invoked.
Collate
boolean
boolean
Indicates if the printer is set to collate multi-copy print jobs.
If a print job consists of three pages and two copies are requested, then the
collated output is 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. The non-collated output is 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3.
DeferredMediaSelection
Determines if the printer uses the printer’s own internal algorithms or Adobe
PostScript algorithms to select print media. The following values are supported:
True
Uses the printer’s algorithms
False
Uses Adobe PostScript algorithms (default)
DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary
Specifies the following unique printer rendering parameters: Screening,
TonerSaver, PictureGrade, ImageEnhancement, PrintDarkness,
AutoMediaType, EdgeToEdge, DefaultPoliciesPageSize, SubstituteSize,
Type, ColorCorrection, ImageBrightness, ImageContrast, and PrintQuality.
Screening controls which halftone dictionary is installed at the beginning of each
print job. The value is set at the start of a job according to the print quality settings
selected from the printer operator panel.
The following names are valid:
ColorGrade™
PictureGrade
IET
600 dpi printing
300 dpi, 600 dpi, or 1200 dpi printing with PictureGrade On
1200 Image Quality printing or 2400 Print Quality
IETImagesOnly 1200 Image Quality printing for images; 600 dpi printing for
text and graphics or maps to IET and sets Print Quality to
either 1200 Image Quality or 2400 Print Quality
IETPictureGrade 1200 Image Quality printing with PictureGrade On
None
300 dpi or 600 dpi printing with PictureGrade Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-49
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
TonerSaver is a boolean that controls the Toner Saver feature.
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
True
Starts the printer toner saver mechanism
Stops the printer toner saver mechanism
False
Notes:
• A PostScript job can override the effect of Screening by using sethalftone,
setscreen, or setcolorscreen operators, unless Screening is set to IET or
IETPictureGrade.
• A PostScript job can enter or exit IET or PictureGrade using the Screening
parameter in a setpagedevice call. This does not change the user default
printer settings for print quality, which are read and used by the interpreter for
the next print job unless the setpagedevice is issued in a startjob context.
• If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, TonerSaver is set to False. This
is true for all models except the Optra C710, Optra M410, Optra T family, and
Optra W810.
PictureGrade is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark laser
printer drivers. PictureGrade works in conjunction with Screening.
If Screening is set to None or PictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to None
Changes Screening to PictureGrade
If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade, the values for PictureGrade affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to IET
Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
ImageEnhancement is an integer that provides compatibility with previous
Lexmark laser printer drivers. ImageEnhancement works in conjunction with
Screening.
If Screening is set to None or IET, the values for ImageEnhancement affect
Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to None
Changes Screening to IET
If Screening is set to PictureGrade or IETPictureGrade, the values for
ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way:
0
1
Changes Screening to PictureGrade
Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade
PrintDarkness specifies the value of the Print Darkness printer setting. Legal
values are:
1
2
3
4
5
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-50
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
AutoMediaType is a boolean that controls the MediaType entries in the
InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary.
True
MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries cannot be
modified by the user. The values are confined to values known by
the printer operating system.
False
MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries can be
modified by the user.
EdgeToEdge is a boolean which determines if there should be an unprintable
area on the page.
True
Print to the edge of the paper.
False
Do not print to the edge of the paper (default).
DefaultPoliciesPageSize is an integer which equals the PageSize parameter in
the Policies dictionary unless PageSize is set to 23; in that case,
DefaultPoliciesPageSize equals the PageSize parameter value before it was set
to 23 or equals 0 if the PageSize parameter is initialized to 23. For more
SubstituteSize allows for the substitution of A4- and Letter-size print materials,
and A3- and 11x17 inch-size print materials for each other when one size is not
installed.
Note: For size substitution to occur, the substituted print material and the
requested print material must be of the same paper type.
The following values are supported:
/Off
No size substitution is performed.
/A4-Letter
If A4 is requested but not installed and Letter is installed, Letter
is substituted for A4. Or, if Letter is requested but not installed
and A4 is installed, A4 is substituted for Letter.
/A3-11x17
If A3 is requested but not installed and 11x17 is installed,
11x17 is substituted for A3. Or, if 11x17 is requested but not
installed and A3 is installed, A3 is substituted for 11x17.
/All
Both size substitutions are permitted.
Note: When the size substitution occurs, the page is scaled to the size of the
requested print material.
The DefaultPoliciesPageSize value is used as the effective policy when:
• The SubstituteSize parameter is not set to /Off and a size substitution cannot
be performed.
• The PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary is set to 23.
Notes:
• If SubstituteSize is set to /Off, the effective policy is the value of PageSize.
• If SubstituteSize is not set to /Off and a size substitution is possible, the
effective policy is 3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-51
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DeviceRenderingInfo
(continued)
dictionary
ColorCorrection is a null, string, or name object that controls the appearance of
colors. The value is determined by the user default setting in the Color Correction
menu item. The following values are supported:
-null-
/Display
/Vivid
ImageBrightness is an integer that controls the brightness of images. The
following values are supported:
-100 ... 100
0 (default)
ImageContrast is an integer that controls the contrast of images. The following
values are supported:
-100 ... 100
0 (default)
PrintQuality is an integer that controls the print quality settings. The following
values are supported:
0
1
2
3
Quick Print
Normal
Presentation
1200 Image Q
Duplex
boolean
Indicates if printed pages are duplexed (printed on both sides of the page) or
simplexed (printed on one side of the page).
True
Print duplex mode
False
Print simplex mode (default)
EndPage
procedure
Executes at the end of each printed page to indicate if the contents of raster
memory should be printed. EndPage gets two integer arguments through the
operand stack: one is a count of the previous showpage executions and the other
is the code that indicates the execution condition.
The code is 0 (zero) if it is called from showpage, 1 if it is called from copypage,
and 2 if it is called during device deactivation. The procedure must return a
boolean value.
ExitJamRecovery
HWResolution
boolean
integer
Indicates the setting of the Jam Recovery menu item.
True
Jam Recovery is set to On.
False
Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto (model specific).
Indicates the resolution of the printer (in pixels per inch) along the x and y
dimensions of the device space. x and y are always equal. The following
resolutions are supported:
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-52
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
ImagingBBox
array or null
Defines a rectangle that lies within the boundaries of the page specified by
PageSize. ImagingBBox may be either a value of null or an array of four numbers.
A value of null indicates the bounding box is the largest imageable area possible
for a given page size.
InputAttributes
dictionary
Contains information about the various installed input sources. There is a
numeric key, which is a dictionary, for each installed input source.
Input sources
The numeric keys are:
Key
Source
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tray 1
Tray 2
Envelope feeder
Tray 3
Multipurpose feeder
Tray 4
Tray 5
The entries in each input source dictionary describe the media that is currently
available in the source. The allowable keys in each source dictionary are:
PageSize
MediaColor
MediaWeight
MatchAll
InputLocation
Read only string which indicates the physical tray
corresponding to the source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-53
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
InputAttributes
(continued)
dictionary
Mode is a key within the InputAttributes dictionary, and its value is a name that
determines the mapping of the physical input sources to the input sources listed
in InputAttributes. The allowable values are:
/Default
Printer’s default source assignment
/Optra
Specifies the following ordering used in InputAttributes:
0 - Tray 1
1 - Tray 2
2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder
3 - Tray 3
4 - Multipurpose feeder
5 - Tray 4
6 - Tray 5
7 - Feeder 2
/HPLJFamily1
Specifies the following ordering used by the Hewlett-
Packard Company’s printers:
0 - Tray 1
1 - Tray 2
2 - Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder
3 - Multipurpose feeder (see Note)
4 - Tray 3
5 - Tray 4
6 - Tray 5
7 - Feeder 2
Note: Values 3 and 4 for the Hewlett Packard Company’s LaserJet printers are
switched relative to the /Optra values 3 and 4.
Priority is an array of integers that describes the order in which the input sources
are searched. The first integer represents the highest priority source and so on. If
no array exists or none of the matching sources is in the array, then the priority
order is arbitrary.
Install
Jog
procedure
integer
Installs device dependent parameters into the graphics state. This procedure can
modify any parameter in the graphics state.
Specifies which Offset Pages setting is used. The following values are supported:
0
1
2
3
Offset Pages is disabled.
Offset Pages is disabled.
Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs.
Offset Pages is set to Between Copies.
Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two
separate groups in an output bin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-54
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
ManualFeed
boolean
Indicates if the current (or active) source is a manual source. The following values
are supported:
True
Manual feed
False
Automatic feed
If ManualFeed is set to True, and a change is made to PageSize, MediaWeight,
MediaColor, or MediaType parameters, no matching occurs. It is assumed that
the correct page is fed.
Note: ManualFeed is initialized at the start of each print job according to the
default paper source set by the operator panel menus or through PJL. If the
default paper source is a manual source, ManualFeed is set to True. If the default
paper source is not a manual paper source, ManualFeed is set to False.
ManualFeedTimeout
integer
Indicates the amount of time that the printer waits for you to manually load a
sheet of paper.
0
i nf i ni t e wa i t or no t i me out
If the timeout expires, a timeout error is generated.
This is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the
Feed Timeout menu item value.
MediaColor
string name
or null
Specifies the color of the current media.
MediaPosition
integer
Specifies the tray to select, if possible, whether it is the best match or not.
Policies may be consulted to determine the selection. For example, assume
there is legal-size paper in Tray 1 and letter-size paper in all the other trays, and
the Policy for the PageSize page device parameter is 1. The command
<< / Pa ge Si z e [ 612 1008] / Me di a Pos i t i on 1 >> s et pa ge de vi c e
selects Tray 2 even though Tray 1 is a perfect match, because the PageSize
Policy of 1 allows the PageSize to be ignored.
MediaType
MediaWeight
NumCopies
Nup
string name
or null
Indicates the type of the current media. The value of the string is arbitrary and
may describe any attribute not already defined by size, color, or weight.
2
integer or
null
Specifies the weight of the current media in g/m . The value is either null or a
number.
integer or
null
Specifies the number of copies of each page that should be printed. If the value is
null, the current value of #copies determines the number of copies to print.
boolean
Determines if Nup is On or Off. Use the Nup function to print multiple page
images on a single page, where the value of N refers to the number of pages. For
example, 2-Up means two page images are printed on one page.
True
Nup is On and the NupDetails parameters are active.
False
Nup is Off.
For some printers, the value of Nup is set through the Multipage Printing menu
item. For more information about multipage printing (Nup), see your printer
documentation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-55
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
NupDetails
dictionary
Describes the specific actions performed when the Nup function is active.
Rows is an integer that specifies the number of rows to print on a portrait-oriented
page.
Columns is an integer that specifies the number of columns to print on a portrait-
oriented page.
Rows and Columns are limited to these values:
Rows
Columns
2
3
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
Orientation specifies the orientation of the individual Nup pages on the printed
page. Supported values are:
0
1
Portrait
Landscape
Orientation determines the positioning of multiple page images on pages printed
using NupDetails. You may choose one of four different orders. The positioning of
page images depends on whether they are sent to the printer as portrait or
landscape images. The following examples show the result of using each setting
on a 2-row, 2-column page:
Horizontal
Vertical
Portrait Landscape
Portrait Landscape
Page
2
Page Page
Page
1
3
1
Page
4
Page Page
Page
3
2
4
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Portrait Landscape
Portrait Landscape
Page
1
Page
2
Page
1
Page
3
Page
3
Page
4
Page Page
4
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-56
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
NupDetails
(continued)
dictionary
Border specifies the type of border to draw around the individual Nup pages.
Supported values are:
0
1
No border
A solid black line
Order is an integer that specifies how the Nup pages are placed on the printed
page. Supported values are as follows, with first the value, the orientation, and
the description:
0
1
2
3
H
The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed across and then down.
The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed down and then across.
V
RH The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed across and then down.
RV The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page
and subsequent pages are placed down and then across.
LandscapeOverride is a boolean which specifies the orientation of Nup pages.
Supported values are:
False
True
Orientation is specified by the PageSize parameter.
Orientation is assumed to be Landscape regardless of the
orientation specified by the PageSize parameter.
Note: The PostScript emulation interpreter has to know the orientation of Nup
pages to position the pages correctly on a hostpage. However, during the
translation process, many landscape pages are created in portrait orientation by
using the PageSize parameter. Then, the page is rotated to create the
appearance of landscape orientation. When this happens, the PostScript
emulation interpreter cannot place the Nup page correctly on the hostpage
unless the PageSize parameter is set correctly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-57
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
OutputAttributes
dictionary
Contains information about the output bin targets. There is a numeric key, which
is a dictionary, for each installed output bin. OutputType and OutputLocation are
the allowable keys in each output dictionary. OutputType is used in the search
algorithm to determine which output bin is used as the exit path.
The numeric keys are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Standard Output Bin or Top Output Bin
Optional Output Bin 1 or Rear Output Bin
Optional Output Bin 2
Optional Output Bin 3
Optional Output Bin 4
Optional Output Bin 5
Optional Output Bin 6
Optional Output Bin 7
Optional Output Bin 8
Optional Output Bin 9
10 Optional Output Bin 10
OutputType fields can be assigned strings to specify the output destination.
For example:
<< / Out put At t r i but e s << 0 << / Out put Type
( St a nda r d Bi n) >> >> >> s e t pa ge de vi c e
<< / Out put At t r i but e s << 1 << / Out put Type
( Opt i ona l Out put Bi n 1 Exi t ) >> >> >> s e t pa gede vi c e
For more information, see “OutputType” on page 4-57.
OutputLocation key is a read-only string that represents the name of the
associated destination.
The OutputAttributes dictionary contains a Priority Array. If an OutputType string
does not match, the priority array is searched in order for a valid output bin.
The initial value of the priority array is set at the beginning of a job and is equal to
the value of the menu item for OutputBin. The array can be changed using this
setpagedevice operator:
<< / Out put At t r i but e s << / Pr i or i t y
[
1 0 ] >> >> s e t pa ge de vi c e
This command gives the Optional Output Bin 1 (1) a higher priority than the
Standard Bin (0). Once the command is issued, if no match is found for the
OutputType string, the paper exits into the standard output bin.
OutputPage
OutputType
boolean
string
Specifies if pages are actually printed. Supported values are:
True
Job is processed as usual (default).
False
No page is printed, but all other job processing occurs.
Specifies the output bin destination for the current page. If the destination is not
null, setpagedevice compares it with the OutputType values in the
OutputAttributes dictionary during the search algorithm. If a match is found, this
output bin is the target output for the current page.
PageDeviceName
string name
or null
Assigns or names a page device by using a string parameter. This is used by the
findcolorrendering operator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-58
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PageSize
array
Specifies the size (width and height) of the current page in 1/72 inch units. A
value of [0 0] is assumed to be the lower left corner of the physical page and
[width height] is the upper right corner.
Policies
dictionary
Uses entries to describe the actions to perform when a particular function cannot
be completed. The entries are as follows:
PageSize is an integer that specifies what recovery action to use when PageSize
cannot be matched with any available media (paper, envelope, or other print
materials). The actions are:
0
1
2
3
Generate a configurationerror. (default)
Ignore the requested PageSize.
Interact with a human operator or print manager.
Select the next larger or smaller available media and adjust the
page to fit.
4
5
Select the next larger available media and adjust the page to fit.
Select the next larger or smaller available media, but do not adjust
the page.
6
7
Select the next larger available media, but do not adjust the page.
Disable media selection. Implement the requested PageSize on the
previously selected media without making adjustments. The way
the image is positioned on the media is printer-dependent and may
result in part of the image being clipped.
23
If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary is set to Off, the effective policy executed is the value of
the DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the
DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off
and an installed source has installed media which may be
substituted for the requested media, the effective policy executed is
3. If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary is set to a value other than Off and a media substitution
cannot be made, the effective policy executed is the value of the
DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo
dictionary.
PolicyNotFound is an integer that specifies which recovery action to use when a
requested feature other than PageSize cannot be matched with any key in the
Policies dictionary.
The actions are:
0
1
2
Generate a configurationerror.
Ignore the requested feature (default).
Interact with a person or print manager.
PolicyReport is a procedure that is called when a successful setpagedevice is
finished. The procedure consults policies to process unsatisfied feature requests
if needed. Default value is {pop}.
PostRenderingEnhance
boolean
Always True to indicate that PostRenderingEnhanceDetails is enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-59
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PostRenderingEnhance
Details
dictionary
Describes enhancements that are made to the output after the page has been
held in memory.
REValue is an integer that specifies the current value of the PQET menu item.
Supported values are:
0
PQET is Off.
1 to 4
PQET is On (default is 1).
Type is a constant value. To find the value of Type for your printer, see
PowerSave
integer
A value of 1—120 or 1—240 (model specific) indicates the number of minutes that
elapses after the last page prints and before the Power Saver feature is invoked.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates the Power Saver feature is turned Off on some
printer models.
Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as
Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled.
This value is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of
the Power Saver menu item.
Note: This parameter can only be modified within a system administration job.
ProcessColorModel
name or
string
Specifies the color model to use for rendering process colors in the printer.
Supported values are:
DeviceGray
DeviceRGB
DeviceCMYK
DeviceCMY
Punch
integer
integer
Requests holes to be punched in the output page. The format for setting the
Punch key is:
<</ Punc h n>> s e t pa ge de vi c e
where n is one of the following values:
0
3
Do not punch holes in the output page.
Punch holes in the output page.
SlipSheet
Specifies where blank separator sheets should be inserted in the output.
Supported values are:
0
1
2
3
Do not insert separator sheets.
Insert a separator sheet at device deactivation.
Insert a separator sheet at the end of the print job.
Insert a separator sheet at the end of each set in a multicopy job.
If Collate is set to True, a set consists of one copy of each page of the
document. For example, if a print job is five pages long, a set is one
copy of pages one to five. If Collate is set to False, a set is all the
copies of a single page of the job. For example, if a print job is three
copies of a five page job, a set is three copies of the first page.
Insert a separator sheet after each showpage or copypage.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-60
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
SlipSheetDetails
dictionary
Specifies the following two unique separator sheet parameters: SlipSheetSource
and Type.
SlipSheetSource is an integer type parameter which identifies the source used for
separator sheets. Supported values are:
Null
0
Use current source (default)
Tray 1
1
Tray 2
2
3
Envelope Feeder
Tray 3
4
5
Multipurpose feeder
Tray 4
6
Tray 5
The key is found in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary within pagedevice. It can
be altered using a setpagedevice operator.
/ Sl i pShe e t Det a i l s << / Type 96
/ Sl i pShe e t Sour c e n>> >> s e t pa ge de vi c e
Staple
integer
Specifies whether to staple the current print job.
Supported values are:
0
1
2
3
4
Do not staple the print job.
Staple each set in the front position.
Staple each set in the rear position.
Staple each set according to the Auto setting.
Staple each set in the dual position.
The format for setting the Staple key is:
<</ St a pl e n>> s e t pa ge de vi c e
TraySwitch
boolean
Indicates tray linking is always active. When the media in one input source is
depleted, other input sources are searched to determine if the same media can
be found in another source. If another source is found, the alternate source is
selected. The media in both input sources must be the same size and type for
tray linking to occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-61
Table 4-8: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Tumble
boolean
Indicates the orientation of the second side of a duplexed page with respect to
the first side. Supported values are:
True
Causes pages to print as if they are to be bound across the top of
the page (image is rotated 180°on the back side of the page)
Causes pages to print as if they are to be side bound (as in a book)
False
UniversalDetails
dictionary
Controls the variable Universal paper size feature. The entries are as follows:
PageSize is an array of two numbers (real or integer) that defines the x and y
values (in points) for Universal.
Orientation is an integer that defines how the Universal paper will be fed through
the printer. Supported values are:
0
1
Paper is fed short edge first.
Paper is fed long edge first.
Prompt defines a string to be displayed on the operator panel when the printer
prompts a user to load Universal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-62
Interpreter Parameters
This section describes the PostScript emulation interpreter parameters. There are
three types of interpreter parameters:
• User parameters
• System parameters
• Device parameters
User Parameters
The following user parameters are used by setuserparams and currentuserparams.
If a value is requested that is not within the range for the requested parameter, the
minimum (or maximum) value is used.
If a setuserparams value does not match the type of the specified parameter, a
typecheck error occurs. If a parameter is not supported by the printer, it is ignored.
An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the
parameter.
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
AccurateScreens
boolean
Controls whether the accurate screen algorithm is used during subsequent
executions of the setscreen and setcolorscreen operators.
CollatedCopies
integer
Requests the number of collated copies to print for the job. The CollatedCopies
parameter must be set before the first page of the job has been sent.
If CollatedCopies is set to zero, the parameter has no effect on the job. If
CollatedCopies is set to a number other than zero, the value of #copies and of
the NumCopies and Collate pagedevice parameters are ignored for the job.
Legal values: Any integer between 0 and 999, inclusive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-63
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HalftoneMode
integer
Affects the results of subsequent halftone setting operators such as setscreen,
setcolorscreen, and sethalftone. The HalftoneMode parameter has no effect on
the current halftone.
Legal values:
0
Normal mode of operation. The operators setscreen,
setcolorscreen, and sethalftone are not affected.
Execution of setscreen, setcolorscreen, or sethalftone causes a
default screen to be used rather than the screen given by the job.
The default screen depends on the current resolution and
parameters in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary in the
pagedevice dictionary that is in affect at the time the halftone
operator is executed.
1
2
Not supported. HalftoneMode is set to 1.
IdiomRegnition
JobName
boolean
string
Legal values:
True
Procedure substitution is enabled during execution of the bind
operator.
Idiom recognition is disabled.
False
Name of the current job for status responses.
Legal values: Any alphanumeric characters in the ASCII printable range (X'20'
through X'FE') excluding the characters ; and ]. Maximum length is 80
characters (characters beyond 80 characters are truncated).
JobTimeout
integer
Number of seconds a print job executes before it is terminated and a PostScript
emulation timeout error is generated.
Set to 0 to disable job timeout.
JobTimeout is initialized to the value of the JobTimeout system parameter at
the beginning of each job.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxDictStack
MaxExecStack
MaxFontItem
integer
integer
integer
Maximum elements in a dictionary stack.
Legal value: Any integer between 40 and 255, inclusive.
Maximum elements in the execution stack.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75.
Maximum number of bytes occupied by the pixel array of a single character in
the font cache.
There is an upper limit dependent on the MaxFontCache system parameter
and the amount of printer memory.
Legal values: Any non-negative integer.
MaxFormItem
MaxLocalVM
integer
integer
Maximum number of bytes occupied by a single cached form.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
Maximum bytes occupied by values in local VM.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 76800 or the amount of local
VM currently in use plus a small margin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-64
Table 4-9: PostScript Emulation User Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
MaxOpStack
integer
Maximum elements in the operand stack.
Legal value: Any integer greater than or equal to 75.
Maximum bytes occupied by a single cached pattern.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
Maximum bytes occupied by a single halftone screen.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxPatternItem
MaxScreenItem
MaxSuperScreen
integer
integer
integer
Establishes an upper limit for the number of pixels in the supercell. Supercells
affect Type 1 and Type 2 halftones.
If MaxSuperScreen is set to zero, the use of supercells is prevented.
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
Maximum bytes occupied by a single user path.
MaxUPathItem
integer
Legal value: Any integer between zero and half of RamSize.
(Read-only) This value is always the value of MAXINTEGER.
MinFontCompress
PageCount
integer
integer
(Read-only) This value is a running sum of the number of pages submitted by
the PostScript interpreter to the print engine for printing.
Note: This value is reset to 0 (zero) during PostScript initialization. Since
PostScript initialization by the printer cannot be known, we recommend querying
the value of PageCount at the beginning of a job and at the end of a job, and
then calculating the difference to determine how many pages are submitted to
the printer for a specific job.
This parameter is not valid for tracking pages between jobs.
Legal values:
UseOldcopypage
VMReclaim
boolean
integer
True
Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the
PostScript Level 2 description.
False
Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the
PostScript 3 description.
Legal values:
0
Enables automatic garbage collection
-1
Disables automatic garbage collection for local Virtual Memory
(VM)
-2
Disables automatic garbage collection for both local and global
VM
VMThreshold
WaitTimeout
integer
integer
Frequency of automatic garbage collection, which occurs when the specified
number of bytes have been allocated since the previous collection.
Legal value: Any integer from 8192 to 500000, inclusive.
Number of seconds the interpreter waits to receive additional characters from
the host before it terminates the current print job by executing a PostScript
emulation timeout error.
A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout. WaitTimeout is initialized to the value
of the WaitTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each print job.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-65
System Parameters
The setsystemparams operator sets the values of the specified system parameters.
This operator requires a password if one is set. The currentsystemparams operator
returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters.
Values supplied to setsystemparams that are outside the range or limits for the
specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors. An
appropriate value is used. For example, if you set JobTimeout to 14, it is actually set
Values supplied to setsystemparams that do not match the type of the specified
parameter cause typecheck errors. Parameters that are not supported by the printer
are ignored. An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on
the parameter. Write-only parameters are not returned by currentsystemparams.
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
BuildTime
integer
(Read-only) Timestamp identifying the specific build of the
PostScript emulation interpreter.
ByteOrder
boolean
(Read-only) Native (preferred) order of multiple-byte numbers
in binary encoded tokens.
Fa l s e hi gh- or de r f i r s t
Tr ue
l ow- or de r f i r s t
CurDisplayList
CurFontCache
integer
integer
integer
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the font cache.
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the form cache.
CurFormCache
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-66
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
CurInputDevice
string
(Read-only) The name of the communications device
corresponding to the current input file
for the PostScript emulation program
which is currently executing. Possible
values are:
%LocalTalkA% %TokenTalkD%
%LocalTalkB% %LexLinkB%
%LocalTalkC% %LexLinkC%
%LocalTalkD% %LexLinkD%
%SerialA%
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
%ParallelA%
%ParallelB%
%ParallelC%
%ParallelD%
%IR_A%
%PrintServerB%
%PrintServerC%
%PrintServerD%
%RemotePrinterB%
%RemotePrinterC%
%RemotePrinterD%
%AppSocketB%
%AppSocketC%
%AppSocketD%
%LPR_B%
%IR_B%
%IR_C%
%LPR_C%
%IR_D%
%LPR_D%
%EtherTalkB% %UnknownDevice%
%EtherTalkC% %USB_A%
%EtherTalkD% %USB_B%
%TokenTalkB% %USB_C%
%TokenTalkC% %USB_D%
CurOutlineCache
CurOutputDevice
integer
string
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
(Read-only) The name of the communications device
corresponding to the current output file for the PostScript
emulation program which is currently executing. This string is
the same as CurInputDevice.
CurPatternCache
CurScreenStorage
CurSourceList
integer
integer
integer
integer
integer
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the pattern cache.
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
(Read-only) This value is always zero.
CurUPathCache
DisableFastProcs
(Read-only) Bytes currently occupied by the user path cache.
This bit field allows precompiled PostScript procedures to be
selectively disabled. These precompiled procedures speed
the execution time of some application-generated print jobs
by substituting PostScript procedures in the job’s ProcSet with
fast functions that are built into the printer firmware.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-67
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DoPrintErrors
boolean
Specifies whether to print an error page using a built-in error
handler when a PostScript emulation error occurs.
True
Print PS Error user default value is set to On.
False
Print PS Error user default value is set to Off.
DoStartPage
boolean
boolean
(Read only) Always returns False.
1
EnableExtraFonts
True
All 75 resident fonts are enabled.
Original 39 PostScript fonts are available.
False
Note: Changes to this parameter take effect when PostScript
is restarted.
1
EngineBoot
string
string
integer
(Read-only) Specifies the version of the boot code.
(Read-only) Specifies the version of the engine code.
1
EngineCode
1
EngineSpeed
(Read-only) Maximum speed of the print engine in pages per
minute.
2
EnvironmentSave
FactoryDefaults
boolean
Indicates or modifies the Resource Save user default value.
True
Resource Save user default value is set to On.
False
Resource Save user default value is set to Off.
Note: When a job changes this parameter from False to True,
all interpreter tasks such as PostScript and PCL are
terminated and restarted at the end of the current job.
boolean
integer
If set to True and the printer is then immediately powered off,
all non-volatile parameters revert to factory default values at
the next power-on. The print job that sets FactoryDefaults to
True must be the last job executed before power-off;
otherwise, the request is ignored.
FatalErrorAddress
FontResourceDir
The address at which a fatal system software error occurred.
It is stored in this parameter before execution is stopped. It is
also transmitted to the host over the communications
channel.
string
string
string
string
Specifies the location in the file system for font resource files.
(Read-only) The version of the font read-only memory (ROM).
Specifies the location in the file system for resource files.
1
FontVersion
GenericResourceDir
GenericResourcePathSep
Concatenated to the GenericResourceDir and the category
name. It is followed by the resource name to get the external
location of the resource.
Example: If GenericResourceDir and
GenericResourcePathSep were (Resource/) and (/),
respectively, the LexmarkLogo resource of the Pattern
category would be in Resource/Pattern/LexmarkLogo.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-68
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
InstalledRam
integer
(Read-only) Indicated, in bytes, the total amount of installed
printer memory (RAM) in the system.
Note: InstalledRam should not be confused with RamSize
which is the amount of memory (RAM) available to the
formatting interpreters and the graphics engine.
JobTimeout
integer
integer
The value in seconds to which the user parameter
JobTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job. If
you set the system parameter JobTimeout to a negative
value, it is ignored and the previous setting of JobTimeout is
used. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the timeout is infinite.
If you set a number between 1 and 14, 15 is set.
Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355
languagelevel
The value of languagelevel integer in systemdict always
matches the value of this system parameter. If set to 2, the
printer will behave as though /UseOldcopypage and
/UseOldfonts are both true (regardless of their actual values).
The latter two parameters will return their actual values when
queried.
Legal Values: 2, 3
2
MaxDisplayAndSourceList
MaxDisplayList
integer
integer
integer
integer
(Read-only) This value is always the same value as
InstalledRam.
of your printer.
MaxFontCache
of your printer.
MaxFormCache
Maximum bytes occupied by the form cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
MaxImageBuffer
MaxOutlineCache
MaxPatternCache
integer
integer
integer
of your printer.
of your printer.
Maximum bytes occupied by the pattern cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
2
MaxPermanentVM
integer
integer
integer
of your printer.
MaxRasterMemory
of your printer.
MaxScreenStorage
of your printer.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-69
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
MaxSourceList
integer
of your printer.
MaxUPathCache
integer
Maximum bytes occupied by the user path cache.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
PageCount
integer
string
string
string
(Read-only) Total number of pages that have been printed.
(Read-only) Version of the operator panel code.
(Read-only) Firmware version of the printer controller card.
1
PanelCode
1
PrinterCode
PrinterName
Initialized from the printer name stored in NVRAM (the default
name of the printer). If this parameter is set to a zero length
string, the PrinterName is set to the value of the product
string in statusdict.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
RamSize
integer
string
(Read-only) Total amount of memory (in bytes) installed in the
printer.
RealFormat
(Read-only) Preferred representation for real numbers in
binary encoded tokens.
Revision
integer
boolean
(Read-only) The current revision level of the machine-
dependent portion of PostScript emulation.
1
SearchBuiltinFontsFirst
Controls the device search order the interpreter uses to
locate fonts.
1
SerialNumber
string
string
(Read-only) Serial number of your printer.
StartJobPassword
(Write-only) Controls the ability of the startjob operator to
alter initial Virtual Memory (VM).
Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null
characters. An integer is converted to a string.
StartupMode
integer
Controls the system start file (Sys/Start) during PostScript
emulation initialization. Also, controls the job start file (Job/
Start) before each print job.
0
1
Disable use of Sys/Start file and Job/Start file.
Sys/Start file executes (if present on disk or flash).
10 Job/Start file executes before each user job.
11 Both files run (a combination of 1 and 10).
Legal Values: 0 <= x <= 255. Values other than the four listed
are equivalent to 0.
Note: If both flash and disk have a Sys/Start file and Job/Start
file, the value of the SearchOrder for the two devices
determines which file is executed.
1
StaticRamSize
integer
(Read-only) Amount of static memory (in bytes) on the
controller board.
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-70
Table 4-10: PostScript Emulation System Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
SystemParamsPassword
string
(Write-only) Controls the ability of setsystemparams to
change the values of system parameters and setdevparams
to change the values of device parameters.
Legal value: Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non-null
characters. An integer is converted to a string.
3
UseOldcopypage
boolean
boolean
True indicates the copypage command is processed as
defined in PostScript Level 2 description. False indicates the
copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript 3
description.
3
UseOldFonts
True redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match
the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript Level
2. The font names in parentheses are the equivalent
PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2
names.
Antique Olive
(Antique Olive Roman)
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
(Letter Gothic Slanted)
Univers Bold
False restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3.
ValidNV
boolean
integer
(Read-only) Indicates if non-volatile memory is currently used
to store persistent parameters. If this memory is found
defective during system initialization, factory defaults are
used. If further testing reveals this memory is defective, it is
not used and ValidNV is False. Otherwise, ValidNV is True.
WaitTimeout
The value, in seconds, to which the user parameter
WaitTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job.
Negative values are ignored and the previous setting is used.
A value of zero indicates an infinite timeout. If you select a
number between 1 and 14, 15 is set.
Legal values: x = 0, 15 <= x <= 65355
1
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016.
These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
2
3
These parameters are Lexmark-specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-71
Device Parameters
The currentdevparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the
system parameters.
The setdevparams operator sets the values of the specified device parameters.
• This operator requires a password if one is set.
• Values supplied to setdevparams that are outside the range or limits for the
specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors.
The appropriate value is used.
• Values supplied to setdevparams that do not match the type of the specified
parameter cause typecheck errors.
• If a parameter name is not known, an undefined error occurs.
• An attempt to change the value of a read-only parameter has no effect on the
parameter.
• To specify the parameters for a specific communications channel, use the
appropriate suffix. For example, the serial channels are:
— %SerialA%
— %SerialB%
— %SerialC%
— %SerialD%
For some printers, no “A” channel exists. If %Serial% is specified, it refers to the
channel where the print job is sent.
For additional information on flash memory and disk, see Chapter 6: “Flash Memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-72
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Parallel%, %ParallelA%, %ParallelB%, %ParallelC%, %ParallelD%
(%Parallel_NV% and %Parallel_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Handshake
HasNames
Interpreter
integer
(Read-only) Always returns a value of 2.
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed
Data is lost
OutputDevice
string
(Read-only)
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is set to On.
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Option Slot 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-73
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %Serial%, %SerialA%, %SerialB%, %SerialC%, %SerialD%
(%Serial_NV% and %Serial_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Baud
integer
Returns the value of the Baud menu item.
CheckParity
boolean (Read-only) Designates whether parity checking is done on the incoming data. Supported
values are:
True
Parity menu item set to Even or Odd.
False
Parity menu item set to None or Ignore.
DataBits
integer
Returns the value of the Data Bits menu item.
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
FlowControl
Designates the serial flow control method between the host computer and the device.
Returns a value corresponding to the Serial Protocol menu item. Supported values are:
Dtr
DtrDsr
XonXoff
XonXoffDtr
XonXoffDtrDsr
HasNames
HonorDSR
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
boolean Serial - Honor DSR. Supported values are:
True
Honor DSR is set to On.
False
Honor DSR is set to Off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-74
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Interpreter
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Parity
name
Designates the parity to be used between the host computer and the device. Returns the
value of the Parity menu item. Supported values are:
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
If Parity is set to Ignore, CheckParity is set to False and Parity becomes Even.
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is set to On.
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
boolean Supported values are:
True RobustXon is set to On.
RobustXon
SerialMode
False RobustXon is set to Off.
name
Designates the serial communication configuration: RS232C or RS422. Returns the value
of the Serial RS-232/RS-422 menu item. Supported values are:
RS232
RS422
Returns RS232 on a printer that is attached with a cable that does not support RS-422.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-75
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
StopBits
integer
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
1
2
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LocalTalk%, %LocalTalkA%, %LocalTalkB%, %LocalTalkC%,
%LocalTalkD%
(%LocalTalk_NV% and %LocalTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
string
integer
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
LocalTalkType
The “type” of the AppleTalk network entity name. This parameter also sets the Type
parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility
operator.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter.
Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers.
The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
NodeID
On
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-76
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is On.
PS SmartSwitch is Off.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %EtherTalk%, %EtherTalkA%, %EtherTalkB%, %EtherTalkC%,
%EtherTalkD%
(%EtherTalk_NV% and %EtherTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Supported values are:
True
False
EthernetAddress
EtherTalkType
string
string
(Read only) The Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server.
Legal value: Any string of 17 or fewer non-null characters.
The “type” of the EtherTalk interface entity name. This parameter also sets the
LocalTalkType parameter to the same value. The new value is returned by the
appletalktype compatibility operator.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters. Default value is LaserWriter.
Note: Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers.
The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
EtherTalkZone
string
The “zone” of the EtherTalk interface entity name.
EtherTalkZone is read/write only to RAM. There is no NVRAM variable for EtherTalkZone.
Legal value: Any string of 32 or fewer non-null characters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-77
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
NodeID
On
integer
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is On.
PS SmartSwitch is Off.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IR%, %IR_A%, %IR_B%, %IR_C%, %IR_D%
(%IR_NV% and %IR_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-78
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
boolean (Read-only)
Supported values are:
Definition
Enabled
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %USB%, %USB_A%, %USB_B%, %USB_C%, %USB_D%
(%USB_NV% and %USB_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-79
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
boolean (Read-only)
Supported values are:
Definition
Enabled
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PCLSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1, 2, and 3 (Model specific)
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
name
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %TokenTalk%, %TokenTalkA%, %TokenTalkB%, %TokenTalkC%,
%TokenTalkD%
(%TokenTalk_NV% and %TokenTalk_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Address
Bridging
string
name
(Read-only)
(Read-only) Adaptive
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-80
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
NodeID
On
integer
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PCL SmartSwitch is On.
PCL SmartSwitch is Off.
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
PSSmartSwitch
boolean Supported values are:
True
False
PS SmartSwitch is set to On.
PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-81
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
TokenTalkType
string
Setting this variable does not affect the value of other physical internal print servers.
Note: The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port.
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Type
Zone
name
string
Returns the value identified when the printer makes connection to the network at power on.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %AppSocket%, %AppSocketA%, %AppSocketB%, %AppSocketC%,
%AppSocketD%
(%AppSocket_NV% and %AppSocket_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
name
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-82
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%, %RemotePrinterB%,
%RemotePrinterC%, %RemotePrinterD%
(%RemotePrinter_NV% and %RemotePrinter_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %PrintServer% device.
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
name
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-83
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %PrintServer%, %PrintServerA%, %PrintServerB%,
%PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD%
(%PrintServer_NV% and %PrintServer_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Filtering
Supported values are:
True
False
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
Note: Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding %RemotePrinter%
device.
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
name
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-84
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LPR%, %LPR_A%, %LPR_B%, %LPR_C%, %LPR_D%
(%LPR_NV% and %LPR_Pending% contain the same parameters)
Enabled
boolean (Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
Filtering
name
Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed.
Supported values are:
InterpreterBased
None
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LexLink%, %LexLinkA%, %LexLinkB%, %LexLinkC%,
%LexLinkD%
(%LexLink_NV% and %LexLink_Pending% contain the same parameters)
DelayedOutputClose
boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job. Supported values are:
True
An end-of-file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs
finish printing.
False
An end-of-file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the
interpreter, whether or not that job has finished printing.
This value is set independently for each port.
boolean (Read-only)
Enabled
Supported values are:
True
False
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-85
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HasNames
Interpreter
boolean (Read-only) Always returns False.
name
(Read-only)
Supported values are:
PostScript
AutoSelect
PCL
PPDS
On
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Communications.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %IP%, %IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D%
GatewayAddress
IPAddress
string
string
(Read-only)
(Read-only)
IPAddressDynamic
boolean (Read-only)
Supported values are:
True
False
NetworkMask
On
string
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
Physical
string
string
(Read-only)
PortLocation
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-86
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%, %EthernetPhysicalB%,
%EthernetPhysicalC%, %EthernetPhysicalD%
EthernetAddress
On
string
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%,
%TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%, %TokenRingPhysicalD%
Address
On
string
(Read-only)
boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data.
Supported values are:
True
False
Data is sent and processed.
Data is lost.
PortLocation
string
(Read-only) Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set.
Supported values are:
Standard Port
Option Slot 1
Option Slot 2
Option Slot 3
Speed
Type
integer
name
Supported values are:
4
16
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine%
BSizeStandard
name
(Read-only) Value of JIS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-87
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Darkness
real
Print Darkness and Toner Saver Setting
Designates the print darkness and toner saver setting (model specific).
Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value:
Print Darkness
Setting
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Toner Saver
Setting Value
Darkness Value
Returned
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
0.8
0.9
1.0
Darkest
When the Darkness value is changed, the following ranges determine the Print Darkness
and Toner Saver setting values:
Darkness Value
Print Darkness Toner Saver
Setting Value
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Setting Value
0.0 <=value<=0.15
0.15 <=value<=0.25
0.25 <=value<=0.35
0.35 <=value<=0.45
0.45 <=value<=0.55
0.55 <=value<=0.65
0.65 <=value<=0.75
0.75 <=value<=0.85
0.85 <=value<=0.95
0.95 <=value<=1.0
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Darkest
Print Darkness Setting
Designates the print darkness (model specific).
Legal value: Any non-negative real number from 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
For queries, the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value:
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0.9
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
When the Darkness value is modified, the following ranges are used to determine the Print
Darkness setting:
0.0 - 0.2
Lightest
Lighter
Normal
Darker
Darkest
>0.2 - 0.4
>0.4 - 0.6
>0.6 - 0.8
>0.8 - 1.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-88
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
PageCount
TimeToStandby
integer
integer
(Read-only) Page Count
Power Saver. Supported values are:
0 to 120, in minutes
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console%
Language
Type
name
name
Display Language
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /Parameters.
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%, %CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%,
%CalendarD%
Day
integer
integer
integer
integer
Supported values are:
1—31
Hour
Supported values are:
0—23
Minute
Month
Supported values are:
0—59
Supported values are:
1—12
Running
Second
boolean Signifies whether time is available for this device.
integer
Supported values are:
0—59
Type
name
integer
string
(Read-only) Value of /Parameters
Year
DateTime
DayOfWeekLong
DayOfWeekNum
Date and Time in the format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
Long day name (for example, "Wednesday")
string
integer
Supported values are:
0—6 (0=Sunday)
DayOfWeekShort
string
Short day name (for example, "Wed")
Device Parameters for the IODevice Device %disk1%
BlockSize
Free
integer
integer
(Read-only)
(Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the disk. Valid only if
the disk is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the disk
is not mounted or is full.
HasNames
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the disk supports named files. Valid only if the disk is mounted
(mounted is set to True). If the disk is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-89
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Specifies an action for initializing the disk. Supported values are:
InitializeAction
integer
0
1
Indicates no action; the value returned when the parameter is read.
Indicates that the current file system (if any) should be deleted and a new one
of LogicalSize created (the disk is assumed to have been formatted already).
The disk must first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results.
Reformats the entire disk before creating a new file system of size
LogicalSize.
2
3
(or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the disk x - 2
times.
Note: The current file system refers to /FileSystem. See Type as follows for more
information.
LogicalSize
integer
Specifies the size of the file system to be created and is as an argument by InitializeAction.
• If 0 (zero), InitializeAction uses the size of the entire disk. When queried, indicates the
current size of the file system on the device (in pages). A value of 0 indicates that the
device is not mounted.
• If set with a certain value and the device is reformatted, a query returns the value that
was set. If queried before the disk is reformatted, a different value from the one set may
be returned because it may return the current size.
• If set to 1, 2, or 3, an ioerror occurs.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0. The value must be less than or equal to
the value of PhysicalSize. If set to a value greater than PhysicalSize, or less than zero, a
rangecheck error occurs.
Mounted
boolean
integer
True
False
System attempts to mount the disk.
System attempts to dismount the disk.
A device must contain a valid file system to mount successfully. When a device is mounted,
it is known to the system and is readable. To verify if the device is currently mounted, query
this parameter immediately after setting it.
PhysicalSize
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the disk (in pages). Valid only when the disk is mounted. A
value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted.
Removable
Searchable
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable disks. Always returns False.
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the disk participates in searches in the file system operations that
specify a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the disk
when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a
higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, this value is ignored.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the disk can be opened for write access. If the disk is
write protected, this parameter is a constant equal to False. When the disk is not mounted,
this parameter indicates if the drive supports writeable media.
Device Parameters for the IODevice %flash1%
BlockSize
Free
integer
integer
(Read-only)
(Read-only) Indicates the amount of free space available (in pages) on the flash. Valid if the
flash is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the flash is
not mounted or is full.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-90
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
HasNames
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the flash parameter is only valid when flash is mounted (mounted is
set to True). If flash is not mounted, the parameter has a value of False.
InitializeAction
integer
Specifies an action for initializing flash:
0
1
Indicates no action; the value is returned when the parameter is read.
Indicates that the current file system should be deleted and a new one of
PhysicalSize created (the flash must be formatted already). The flash must
first be mounted; otherwise, an ioerror results.
2
3
Reformats the entire flash before creating a new file system of PhysicalSize
(or greater) has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the flash x — 2
times
Legal value: Any non-negative integer.
LogicalSize
integer
This parameter is not used for InitializeAction.
InitializeAction always formats to PhysicalSize, regardless of what is specified in
LogicalSize. A query returns the current size (in pages) of the file system on the device.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the device is not mounted.
Legal value: Any non-negative integer, including 0 (zero).
The value of LogicalSize must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize. A
rangecheck error occurs if you try to set a larger value or set the value to 0 (zero).
Mounted
boolean
integer
True
False
System attempts to mount the flash.
System attempts to dismount the flash.
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on
the nature of the device.
A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the
device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it.
PhysicalSize
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the flash (in pages) for a flash that is mounted. A value of 0
indicates that the device is not mounted.
Removable
Searchable
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the drive supports removable flash.
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the flash participates in searches in file system operations that
specify a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority at which the flash is
searched for a file in operations where no device has been specified. A lower integer
indicates a high priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has
no meaning.
Type
name
(Read-only) This constant always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the flash can be opened for write access. A write-
protected flash returns False. When the flash is not mounted, this parameter indicates if the
device supports writeable media.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-91
Table 4-11: PostScript Emulation Device Parameters (Continued)
Key
Type
Definition
Device Parameters for the IODevice %rom%
BlockSize
Free
integer
integer
(Read-only)
(Read-only) Indicates the amount (in pages) of free space available in ROM. Valid only if the
ROM is mounted (mounted is set to True). A value of 0 (zero) indicates that either the ROM
is not mounted or it is full.
HasNames
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if ROM supports named files. Valid only if ROM is mounted (mounted
is set to True). If ROM is not mounted, this parameter has a value of False.
InitializeAction
LogicalSize
Mounted
integer
integer
boolean
(Read-only) Always returns a value of 0 (zero), which indicates no action.
(Read-only)
True
System attempts to mount the ROM.
System attempts to dismount the ROM.
False
When a device is mounted, it becomes known to the system and is readable, depending on
the nature of the device.
A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully. To verify if the
device is currently mounted, query this parameter immediately after setting it.
If the ROM device is dismounted, unpredictable results occur.
PhysicalSize
integer
(Read-only) Indicates the size of the ROM (in pages) that is mounted. A value of 0 (zero)
indicates that the device is not mounted. This parameter is only valid when ROM is
mounted.
Removable
Searchable
boolean (Read-only) Always False.
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if ROM participates in searches in file system operations that specify
a filename without specifying a device.
SearchOrder
integer
(Read-only) If the Searchable parameter is True, indicates the priority assigned to the ROM
when searching for a file and no device has been specified. A lower integer indicates a
higher priority. If the Searchable parameter is False, the value of this integer has no
meaning.
Type
name
(Read-only) Always returns the value of /FileSystem.
Writeable
boolean (Read-only) Indicates if the files on the ROM can be opened for write access. Always False.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-92
Status and Error Messages
Printers return PostScript emulation error messages and status information to the
computer through any active interface. To send information to the computer through
the parallel interface, configure the interface as bidirectional.
Tagged Binary Not Active
Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as a status query
when:
• The PostScript emulation interpreter is processing a print job.
• The printer is idle and the PostScript emulation interpreter is the selected
interpreter.
Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as normal data and not
a status query when:
• Another interpreter is processing a print job.
• The printer is idle and another interpreter is the selected interpreter.
Notes:
• Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state.
• Your printer always selects the PostScript emulation interpreter and pro-
cesses a Ctrl-T (x'14') command as a status query when data is received
through the LocalTalk interface.
Tagged Binary Active
When Tagged Binary is active, your printer always responds to a Ctrl-T (x'14')
command as a status query and selects the PostScript emulation interpreter to
process the current print job. Tagged Binary mode is immediately exited at the end of
the print job.
Note: Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript
4-93
Status Messages
Your printer responds to a Ctrl-T (x'14') status query on an interface by sending a
one-line status message back to the host computer over the same interface. If the
status query is received between print jobs and the printer is idle with no error
conditions, an idle response is returned to the host computer.
Status messages are bracketed by the characters %%[ and ] %%, so the computer
software can extract them from other data generated by the current print job. They
follow a standard syntax, consisting of one or more key-value pairs, separated by
semicolons. For example:
%%[ job: Project Report; status: busy; source: Parallel ] %%
The following table lists the possible keys and value descriptions.
Table 4-12: Status Message Keys and Value Descriptions
Key
Value Description
job
The name of the print job, as stored in the JobName entry in statusdict. This
field is omitted if the current print job has no defined JobName.
status
Printer activity at the time the message is sent:
Idle
No job in progress
Busy
Executing a PostScript emulation program and/or printing
pages
Waiting
I/O wait in mid-job
Initializing
Not ready
During startup
Printer menus display or Not Ready displays.
source
Source of the job the server is executing:
Serial
Parallel
Network
USB
LocalTalk
Infrared
Internal
This field is omitted if the server is idle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Languages
5-1
CHAPTER 5: Switching Languages
Your printer may support both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. See your
printer documentation for more information. This chapter describes ways to switch
printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over
another. SmartSwitch is provided with the printer to switch languages. Other methods
of switching languages are:
• PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command
• Sniffing
SmartSwitch
The SmartSwitch feature lets the printer switch to either PCL emulation or PostScript
emulation for each interface (parallel, serial, USB, or network). Your printer is shipped
from the factory with SmartSwitch set to On for all languages and all interfaces.
Consequently, the printer examines all print jobs coming into all its interfaces and
switches between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation dynamically.
If a software program explicitly tells the printer which language to use by a PJL
command, the printer always accepts and uses that explicit command, regardless of
how SmartSwitch has been set from the printer operator panel.
If a software program does not explicitly tell the printer which language to use, the
printer examines the incoming data stream and selects the language.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Languages
5-2
Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces
You can customize your printer so that particular print jobs are sent to particular
interfaces. For example, you may want to send all PostScript emulation jobs to the
network interface and all PCL emulation jobs to the parallel interface. You can do so
by choosing different languages for each interface from the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional and setting the selected language to On for the
interface you want. See your printer documentation for more information.
If you have turned off a particular language for an interface, but then decide to send a
job to that interface using that language, you must begin the job with a PJL command
to override the settings you made from the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional. For example, if you set PCL emulation to Off for the serial
interface and later decide to send a job in that language through that interface, you
must preface the job with a PJL command to override the Off setting. Be sure to end
the job with a Universal Exit Language (UEL) command, which is described on
Printer Job Language
For details on Printer Job Language (PJL) and the PJL ENTER LANGUAGE
command, see “ENTER LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Languages
5-3
Sniffing
Sniffing is:
• Enabled when any End-of-Job point occurs.
• Disabled when a SIC or PJL command within a valid printer language is
received.
The printer examines the received data stream, attempts to determine the type of data
stream, and automatically switches to the proper language.
The printer examines the active printer language and decides when an End-of-Job
point occurs. End-of-Job points are:
• SIC command
• UEL command
• Print timeout
• Wait timeout
• PostScript timeout due to erasing the contents of an internal link
• Ctrl-D in PostScript or tagged binary
• INIT*
• Network Protocol Alliance Protocol job boundary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-1
CHAPTER 6: Flash Memory and Disk
Flash memory and disk devices are used to store permanent fonts, macros, and
symbol sets. The disk device is also used to buffer print jobs, collate large jobs, and
store job statistics. Unlike RAM memory, these devices retain the following information
when the printer is powered off, or when the printer switches languages:
• PCL emulation permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts
• PCL emulation permanent macros
• PCL emulation symbol sets
• PostScript Type 1 fonts
• Files created using the PostScript emulation file operators
• Demonstration files
Some printers have connectors that let you install optional flash memory or a disk
device; other printers may offer one or the other of these devices as a standard
feature. See your printer documentation for more information.
When first installed in the printer, the flash memory or disk may be unformatted. You
must format the device before you download resources. A message displays on the
printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional if the device is unformatted.
Warning: When you format flash memory or a disk, all information currently stored
on the device is lost.
If flash memory or a disk becomes full while downloading resources, a message
displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. The file
being downloaded is not saved unless room is available to store the entire file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-2
Resource Data Collection (Download Target)
Use the Resource Data Collection (Download Target) mode to save the following
information to flash memory or disk:
• Permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts for PCL emulation
• Permanent macros for PCL emulation macros
• Permanent symbol sets for PCL emulation
• Type 1 fonts for PostScript emulation
• Other PostScript resources
Resource Data Collection can be turned On and Off by using:
• The operator panel menus to select Download Target.
• The MarkVision Professional printer utility. You can also download resources
to flash memory and disk or format the flash memory or disk using this printer
utility.
The download target (the destination for the resource data collection) may be RAM
(the default), flash memory, or disk.
If you store resources (fonts, macros, or symbol sets) in RAM, the resources can be
lost if the printer is reset or if the printer language changes while Resource Save is set
to Off. In each case, the resources must be downloaded again. By storing resources
on flash memory or disk, the resources become permanent in the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-3
Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk
Complete the following steps to download resources to flash memory or disk using the
printer operator panel, MarkVision Professional, or a PJL command.
1
Set the download target to flash memory or disk.
Resource Data Collection mode is enabled to the device selected.
2
Download the resources to flash memory or disk using PCL emulation or
PostScript emulation.
• PCL emulation collects and stores the currently defined font, macro, or
symbol set information in printer RAM memory. These resources are written
to flash memory or disk when Resource Data Collection is disabled (see
step 3). Stored resources are also copied to flash memory or disk when a
printer language switch occurs.
• PostScript emulation writes Type 1 fonts or other resources to flash memory
or disk after successfully parsing a definefont operator.
3
Set Download Target to RAM.
Resource Data Collection mode is disabled.
Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk
There are three ways to view the contents of flash memory and disk:
• Select Print Directory from the printer operator panel menus.
• Use the MarkVision Professional utility.
The directory lists the storage device (flash or disk), the names of the files, and the file
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-4
Example of Directory
The Directory that prints appears similar to the one below. An explanation of the parts
of the Directory follows the example.
Optional Font Memory Size 1048576 bytes
Part Name: FLASH
Part Number: (none)
Write password protected
ID
Type
Size
Prot.
Description
=========== =================== ======== ======== ========================
1000
1002
1003
PCL bitmap font
PCL bitmap font
PCL scalable font
PostScript font
User data
32140
52550
254491
134572
1000
1000
1000
10
W
ITClublnGrphBkOb
Courier
CG Times
Courier
My Program
My Demo
Demo
Unknown file type
PCL macro
My Unknown
248
249
R/W
PCL macro
10
mydescription
9 files
476773 bytes used
0 bytes unavailable
571803 bytes free
Optional Font Memory
Expression used to indicate flash memory or disk is installed.
Part Name
Part Name as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If flash memory is formatted
by the printer, the part name field is shown as FLASH. The part name field for the disk
is not printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-5
Part Number
Part Number as it is stored in the flash memory card header. If the flash memory is
formatted by the printer, the part number field is shown as (none). The part number
field for the disk is not printed.
Write Password Protected
Indicates the entire flash memory or disk is write-protected.
If the device is read/write protected, "Read/Write password protected"is printed.
If the device is write-protected, "Write protected"is printed. If the device is not
protected, this line is blank.
ID
Valid for PCL emulation macros, fonts, and symbol sets only. The ID must be used
when adding a description to a macro or a symbol set. If two files with the same file
type have duplicate IDs, the following occurs:
• If multiple macros or symbol sets have been created with duplicate download
IDs, only the last macro or symbol set is listed. It is the only one that can be
selected. On flash memory, the number listed for bytes unavailable
includes the unlisted macros and symbol sets. The bytes unavailablefield
is not applicable for the disk device.
• PostScript emulation fonts, and files created by PostScript emulation file
operators, do not have IDs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-6
Type
File types that can be stored on flash memory or disk have unique extensions. The
following file types are recognized by the flash format used on earlier printer models;
the name of the file type printed in the directory appears in parenthesis.
.t1 (PostScript font)
.sFnt5 (PCL scalable font)
.bFnt5 (PCL bitmap font)
.Mac5 (PCL macro)
Except as noted below, file types listed above are recognized by the flash format used
in your printer. In addition, the flash format in your printer also recognizes the following
formats:
.data (user data) - any file written with PostScript operators
.type1 (PostScript font) - replaces the earlier .t1 extension
.demo (demo) - used for demonstration printouts or forms
.p5scalable (PCL scalable font)
.p5bitmap (PCL bitmapped font)
.p5macro (PCL macro) - replaces the earlier .Mac5 extension
.p5symset (PCL symbol set)
Usually the PostScript file operators can only read/write files with the extension .data.
Use the setfilenameextend operator to read/write other file types, including .demo.
Any other file type appears in the list as Unknown File Type. The description column
then contains the full filename with the file type (extension).
Size
The size listed for each resource includes the size of the file header.
Prot.
Indicates if the file is password protected.
R/W- read/write protection
W- write protection
If this field is blank, then this resource in flash memory or disk is not password
protected.
For more information on file protection, see “File and Device Protection Commands”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-7
Description
The description field for fonts comes from the font header. The description field for
macros or symbol sets is blank unless the description field in the file header is set by
the PJL LRESOURCE command. See “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on
The description for macros or symbol sets can be set only once for files stored in flash
memory. The description can be set any number of times for macros or symbol sets
stored on a disk. The limitation for flash files is due to flash technology. See the
page 3-53 for more information.
Password Protection
You can password protect either the entire flash memory or disk, or files stored on the
flash memory or disk.
There are two levels of password protection:
Read/Write
Ensures that the file or device is protected against reading and writing unless the
password has been appropriately specified (applies only to actual file data).
Write
Ensures that data cannot be changed on a file or device unless the password
has been appropriately specified. A Read/Write password takes precedence
over a Write password.
Each file or device can have a separate password. Write passwords ensure that files
cannot be deleted, renamed, or updated and a device cannot be formatted or
specified as a download target. Read/Write password protection provides the same
protection as Write, but additionally ensures that data cannot be read from the file or
device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-8
By using passwords, administrators can ensure data integrity and proper
authorization. If flash memory is write password protected, for example, users cannot
delete existing files, format the device, or download new files to the device (without first
specifying the password). A specific example might be a macro file of an authorizing
signature that is stored on flash memory with a Read/Write password. This password
ensures that only those authorized can use the signature. All other files (fonts,
letterhead, macros) can be unprotected for general use.
Passwords are set, declared, retracted, and deleted using the PJL commands or the
MarkVision Professional utility. See “Protecting a File or Device” on page 3-93.
Rewriting the Flash Content
Be aware that once a bit on the flash memory is turned from 1 (binary 1) to 0 (binary
0), it cannot be changed back to binary 1 without a complete flash memory format. As
PostScript emulation file operators write data to flash memory, the printer microcode
software verifies that none of the bits being set to binary 1 is binary 0. If any attempt
is made to change a 0 bit back to 1, a PostScript emulation ioerror occurs.
When a device is formatted, all locations are set to binary 1. This is also the reason
descriptions and passwords can be set only once for files on flash memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-9
Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation
File Naming Conventions
For any PostScript emulation operator that requires a filename parameter, the
filename can be one of the following:
%device%filename
Specifically references a file on a particular device. If the filename does not exist
on %device%, no other %device% is accessed for a duplicate filename.
filename
Does not specifically reference a device. The following action occurs:
• For the PostScript emulation operator deletefile, only the first device in the
search order is checked for filename.
• For all other PostScript emulation operators, and all other combinations of
search order and available devices, each installed %device% is checked in
the search order for the existence of filename. The operator acts upon the first
filename that it finds.
Device Names
The term device refers to flash memory, disk, or ROM. For PostScript emulation, some
of the operators require or return device names. These operators are: deletefile,
filenameforall, devforall, devdismount, devmount, devformat, devstatus. The
device always begins and optionally ends with a % character. The following are the
valid device names:
%r om%
%f l a s h%
%f l a s h1%
%di s k%
%di s k1%
The same filename can exist on more than one device. The device prefix determines
the actual file to use. For example, %r om%myf i l e and %f l a s h%myf i l e designate,
respectively, a file called myf i l e both on the ROM and on flash memory. The device
name distinguishes which file to use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-10
Device names are case sensitive. They must appear exactly as shown.
Each device (except the disk) has one synonym. For example, the flash memory can
be referred to as %f l a s h% or %f l a s h1%. The name with the 1 is a unique identifier.
This system allows for future expansion of multiple flash memory or disk devices. The
disk device name provides for multiple physical units and multiple logical units. Thus,
%di s k1_0% indicates the first physical unit and the first ( 0) logical partition on the
device. Currently, one physical device (for ROM, flash memory, and disk) is supported.
The disk supports only the first ( 0) logical partition.
Filenames
Each file on a device has a unique name to identify the information contained within
the file. The name may be up to 127 characters in length. All character codes from
X'01' to X'FF' are valid (X'00' is not valid). Filenames are case sensitive: for example,
%f l a s h%myf i l e and %f l a s h%MYFI LE indicate different files on the flash memory.
Filename Extensions
By default, all files referenced when using the PostScript emulation file operators are
given a .data extension. For example, if the following PostScript emulation command
occurs,
(%flash%myfile) (w) file
the file myfile.data is opened on flash memory. The .data extension is added to:
• Enable the Print Directory feature to identify files as PostScript emulation data
files.
• Ensure the integrity of files, such as resource collection files and
demonstration files.
However, it is sometimes necessary to access files by their real name through
PostScript emulation. For example, you may want to remove old versions of PCL
language resource collection fonts (without formatting the entire device).
To do this, use the PostScript emulation setfilenameextend operator. This operator
is in the statusdict dictionary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-11
The value of this operator adds the extension .data to all filenames referenced when
using PostScript emulation file operators. To prevent the .data extension from being
added, issue the following PostScript emulation command:
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
end
To add the .data extension automatically again, issue:
statusdict begin
true setfilenameextend
end
The following example shows how to remove a file for the font myfont from the disk.
The PostScript emulation resource collection filename is myf ont . t ype 1. The
PostScript emulation command to remove the file is:
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
(%disk%myfont.type1) deletefile
true setfilenameextend
end
For other file types, see page 6-6.
Note: We recommend that you enable setfilenameextend as soon as possible
after you disable it. For example, the following PostScript emulation
commands generate an undefinedfilename error:
(%disk%iconimage) (w) file dup
(0f0606060686c6ff) writestring closefile
statusdict begin
false setfilenameextend
end
(%disk%iconimage) (r) file
%%[ Error: undefinedfilename; OffendingCommand: file ]%%
This occurs because the filename actually written to disk is iconimage.data. When
setfilenameextend is enabled (the default), all PostScript emulation file operators
treat filename operands as filename.data; when disabled, they treat filename
operands literally.
If you receive unexpected undefinedfilename or similar errors, try toggling
setfilenameextend and sending your print job again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-12
Device Search Order
If you are using the PostScript emulation operators run, file, renamefile, status or
eexec, you do not need to specify the device. If you omit the device name, devices are
searched in the default order: disk and then flash memory. If the following PostScript
emulation code is encountered,
(myfile) (w) file
the file on disk is used (since disk occurs before flash memory in the default search
order), and files cannot be created in ROM.
The operator deletefile searches only the first device in the default search order if a
device is not specified.
Use the PostScript emulation operators devmount, devdismount to change the
order. The default search order is determined by the order the devices are mounted.
For example, if you want to place the disk device after the flash memory in the default
search order, use the following command sequence:
(%disk%) devdismount
(%disk%) devmount
To change the order so the devices are searched as disk, flash memory, and then
ROM, use the following PostScript emulation command sequence:
( %r om%) de vdi s mount
( %f l a s h%) de vdi s mount
( %di s k%) de vdi s mount
( %di s k%) de vmount
( %f l a s h%) de vmount
( %r om%) de vmount
If the device is already mounted, the following operators may change the search order:
• initializedisk
• devformat
• <</ I ni t i a l i z e Ac t i on>>s e t de vpa r a ms
Sending these operators has the following effect on the devices in the search order:
1
2
3
If mounted, ( %de vi c e %) devdismount
Formats the device
If dismounted in step 1, (%de vi c e %) devmount
If you do not want a device searched, dismount it and leave it dismounted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-13
Note: Do not leave the ROM device unmounted. All internal fonts are contained on
the ROM device.
In the previous examples, the devmount, devdismount operators must be used
outside the server loop. We recommend that you place the requests in a stop context
so that if the devices do not exist, error recovery can take place.
Previous search orders are not retained. Once a change is made, it remains in effect.
Performance
Some performance degradation may occur during initial access to a resource on a
disk (as opposed to flash memory or RAM). However, the information is put in cache,
and further references to that resource occur at RAM speed.
Table 6-1: Device Performance Retrieval Speeds
Device
Retrieval Speed
70KB/second
1MB/second
Write
Disk
70KB/second
200KB/second
Flash Memory
Job Buffering
Job buffering to the disk lets you store incoming print jobs on a disk installed on your
printer. Although job buffering is designed for individual workstations and networks
using MarkVision Professional as the primary tool to control printer operations, you
can handle some job buffering functions from the printer operator panel. See your
printer documentation for more details.
Job buffering requires a minimum of 10 percent of disk storage space. For example, if
you have an 840MB hard disk installed, you must partition a minimum of 84MB of the
disk for job buffering. You must define the size of the job buffer area before you enable
buffering for any link ports.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-14
For minimum acceptable job buffering performance, the hard disk should be able to
read and write files at a sustained rate of 600Kb/sec. The Lexmark hard disk option
supports this requirement.
Some advantages of job buffering include:
• The printer accepts print jobs more quickly.
• The printer accepts print jobs from all ports as long as the disk is not filled.
• The printer continues to print even after the host computer, network
connection, or printer server goes down.
• Buffered jobs print when power is restored after a printer power loss.
• The printer manages print jobs from multiple sources.
Keep in mind that job buffering may also:
• Slow system performance.
• Restrict the amount of memory available on the disk for other uses.
• Increase the time required for a printer reset or recovery after a power loss.
• Reprint jobs after a power-on reset (POR).
Creating a Partition
Before job buffering is enabled for a port, you must allocate a portion of the disk for job
buffering functions. The minimum size for a job buffering partition is 10 percent of the
disk storage space. When a new partition is created, the entire disk is formatted and
all resources previously downloaded to the disk are lost.
Once a partition is defined, this disk space is reserved for job buffering.
Enabling Job Buffering
Once a partition is allocated, job buffering to a disk may be enabled for each active
link port. You can enable job buffering from the operator panel menus, if available, or
through MarkVision Professional. You cannot enable a port before the partition is
allocated. When buffering is enabled from the printer operator panel, a power-on reset
(POR) automatically occurs. If buffering is enabled through MarkVision Professional,
you must perform a full power-on reset before job buffering can occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory
6-15
Disabling Job Buffering
When you disable job buffering, it takes effect immediately on the port you disabled.
A POR is automatically performed when job buffering is disabled for any port from the
printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional, so the unused memory
resources can be reallocated. When buffering is disabled on a port, any jobs on the
disk are printed before normal processing of incoming jobs continues.
To delete or resize a job buffer partition, first delete or print all jobs. Then, disable job
buffering on all ports. Finally, delete or resize the job buffer partition.
Recovering from a Power Loss
If the printer loses power, the job being spooled to the disk may be lost. Jobs already
stored on the disk remain intact. When power is restored, you are asked if you want
to print the jobs held in the buffer. See your printer documentation for information on
how to cancel the jobs or print the jobs held in the buffer.
Jobs that were partially printed during the loss of power are printed again in their
entirety when power is restored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
7-1
CHAPTER 7: Printer Specifications
This chapter lists printer specifications and information about hardware,
environmental conditions, and power requirements.
Airflow Requirement
Room should meet ASHRAE 62—1989 standards.
Noise Emission Levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported
in conformance with ISO 9296.
Table 7-1: Noise Emission Levels
1-Meter Average Sound
Pressure, dBA
Status
C760, C762 (n)
52 (57)
Printing
Standby (Idle without Power Saver)
34
Declared Sound Power
Level, Bels
Status
C760, C762
Printing
6.8
7.2
4.9
Duplex printing
Standby (Idle without Power Saver)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
7-2
Electrical Specifications
Table 7-2: Printer Electrical Specifications
Printer Model
Electrical Specification
C760, C762 (low voltage model) 100—127 V at 47/63 Hz
C760, C762 (high voltage model) 220—240 V at 47/63 Hz
Warning: Lexmark recommends that you do not use voltage converters with printers.
Power Requirements
The following tables list the nominal average power requirements (including fuser
power).
Printer Model
State
C760, C762
C760, C762 (n)
C760, C762 (dn), (dtn)
100 V 120 V 230 V 100 V 120 V 230 V 100 V 120 V 230V
Average
continuous
printing
650 W 650 W 650 W 830 W 650 W 650 W 650 W 650 W 650 W
Average
continuous
copying
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Average
continuous
scanning
Idle without
Power Saver
(Standby)
180 W 180 W 180 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W
Idle with Power 30 W 30 W 30 W 30 W 30 W
Saver
30 W 30 W 30 W 30 W
Rated short
term current
12.3 A 10.2 A 5.2 A 12.3 A 10.2 A 5.2 A 12.3 A 10.2 A 5.2 A
Note: Power requirements for network models may differ.
Note: his value is <19 W for units manufactured after 4/30/2004.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
7-3
Physical Specifications
Printer Model
C760dn/C762dn
Dimension
Height
C760n/C762n
C760dn/C762dtn
528.3 mm (20.8 in.)
604.5 mm (23.8 in.)
469.9 mm (18.5 in.)
47.7 kg (105 lb)
617.2 mm (24.3 in.)
604.5 mm (23.8 in.)
469.9 mm (18.5 in.)
53.8 kg (118.5 lb)
734.1 mm (28.9 in.)
604.5 mm (23.8 in.)
469.9 mm (18.5 in.)
60 kg (132 lb)
Width
Depth
Weight
Printer Model
C762
C762
with Finisher
Dimension
Height
Max Input Trays
1104.9 mm (43.5 in.)
1051.6 mm (41.4 in.)
604.5 mm (23.8 in.)
469.9 mm (18.5 in.)
81.4 kg (179 lb)
Width
1508.8 mm (59.4 in.)
713.7 mm (28.1 in.)
124.7 kg (274.5 lb)
Depth
Weight
Clearance Requirements
C760n/C762n
C760dn/C762dn
C760 dtn /C762 dtn
Printer Side
Left side
Right side
Front
609.6 mm (24 in.)
381 mm (15 in.)
508 mm (20 in.)
304.8 mm (12 in.)
1066.8 cm (42 in.)
609.6 mm (24 in.)
381 mm (15 in.)
508 mm (20 in.)
304.8 mm (12 in.)
863.6 mm (34 in.)
Rear
Above
Note: When installing the MFP, leave enough room to access the paper
tray(s), the multipurpose feeder, the left side door, and the rear exit
door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
7-4
Environmental Conditions
Note: When shipping or storing printers, always pack the printer supplies
(cartridges and photoconductors, for example) separately.
Table 7-3: Temperature Ranges
Printer Model
Operating Value
Shipping/Storage Value
C760, C762
15.6—32.2°C (60—90°F)
-40—43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Table 7-4: Humidity Ranges
Printer Model
Operating Value
Shipping/Storage Value
C760, C762
8—80%
8—80%
Altitude Specifications
Table 7-5: Printer Altitude Specifications
Printer Model
Altitude (Above Sea Level)
0—3,048 m (10,000 feet)
C760, C762
Atmospheric Pressure
74.6—101.3 kPa (560—760 mmHg)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-1
CHAPTER 8: Printer Interfaces
Interfaces connect your printer to other devices, such as a computer. The Lexmark
C510 has a standard parallel connector (also referred to as a Centronics-type
interface) and/or a USB connector. The Lexmark X422 has an internal print server and
a USB connector. Some printers also offer a parallel interface option. See your printer
interface.
If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install an RS-232C Serial/Parallel
Some printers have standard print servers, but you can also buy optional print servers
that connect the printer to Token-Ring or Ethernet networks. For detailed installation
or setup instructions, see your printer documentation or the Software and
print servers.
See your printer documentation for information on which printer interface options your
printer supports and for detailed installation instructions.
Note: All print servers are capable of supporting AppleTalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-2
Setting Up the Communications Port
You must establish communication between your printer and computer. To do this, you
define your communications port in the application you are using. Instructions for
several applications or operating systems are as follows.
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me
In your Windows 95/98/Me application:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
On the Menu bar, click Start.
Click Settings.
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears.
Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen appears.
Click the Device Manager tab.
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
Double-click the communications port you want to configure.
Click the Properties button at the bottom of the screen.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
9
Click the Port Settings tab.
10 Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
• Bits per second
• Data bits
• Parity
• Stop bits
• Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-3
11 Click OK.
12 Close all windows now that the port is set up.
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0
In your Windows NT 4.0 application:
1
2
3
4
5
6
On the Menu bar, click Start.
Click Settings.
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears.
Double-click the Ports icon. The Ports screen appears.
Select the communications port you want to configure.
Click the Settings button.
The Settings screen for this specific port displays. For example, if you select the
COM1 port, then the Settings for COM1 screen displays.
7
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
• Baud Rate
• Parity
• Stop bits
• Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
8
9
Click OK.
Close all screens now that the port is set up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-4
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000
In your Windows 2000 application:
1
2
3
4
5
6
On the Menu bar, click Start.
Click Settings.
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears.
Double-click the System icon. The System Properties screen appears.
Select the Hardware tab.
In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device
Manager button. The Device Manager screen appears.
7
8
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
9
Click the Port Settings tab.
10 Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
• Bits per second
• Data bits
• Parity
• Stop bits
• Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
11 Click OK.
12 Close all windows now that the port is set up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-5
Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP
In your Windows XP application:
1
2
3
4
5
On the Menu bar, click Start.
Click Control Panel. The Control Panel screen appears.
Switch the Control Panel to Classic View.
Click the Hardware tab.
In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen, click the Device
Manager button. The Device Manager screen appears.
6
7
Scroll down to Ports and click the + once to expand the list of available Ports.
Select the communications port you want to configure and double-click.
The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays. For
example, if you select the COM1 port, then the Communications Port [COM1]
Properties screen displays.
8
9
Click the Port Settings tab.
Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your
printer settings:
• Bits per second
• Data bits
• Parity
• Stop bits
• Flow Control
Note: For Flow Control, select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon/
Xoff for Xon/Xoff protocol.
10 Click OK.
11 Close all windows now that the port is set up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-6
Deciding Which Interface to Use
On some printers, you can attach multiple interface cables to the printer at the same
time. The printer automatically switches to the interface receiving a job. Then it prints
the job and begins searching the interfaces for the next job.
One or more of the following is built into your printer: a standard parallel connector, a
USB connector, or a network connector. To use a port, connect a cable from the printer
to the computer, then set the appropriate values from the printer operator panel or, for
network connected printers only, through MarkVision Professional. See your printer
documentation for more information.
Use a parallel interface when you:
• Attach your printer to a personal computer.
• Attach your printer to a host system with a Centronics-compatible parallel
port.
• Attach your printer to a Lexmark external print server.
Use a USB interface when you:
• Attach your printer to a personal computer, iMac, Sun Ray, or Sun Blade.
• Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available
parallel port.
Use a serial interface when you:
• Require an interface cable more than 10 feet in length.
Note: Lexmark also offers a 20-ft parallel interface cable
(part number 1427498).
• Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available
parallel port.
Attach network cables to the Token-Ring or Ethernet print servers installed in your
printer. Refer to the MarkNet™ Quick Start book or your user documentation for
additional setup information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-7
Parallel Interface
Use the Lexmark 3.04 m (10 ft) parallel cable part number 1021231, or a cable that is
IEEE 1284 compliant, to connect your printer to a personal computer or to a host
system with a Centronics-compatible parallel port. See your printer documentation for
the location of the printer parallel connector.
Note: To reset your printer with an INIT* signal, set Honor Init to On from the printer
operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer
documentation for more information.
Your printer can communicate with a computer across the parallel interface in three
ways:
Computer to Printer
This is typically how a computer and printer communicate. When the printer is
receiving data from the computer, it can use either Standard or Fastbytes protocol.
The burst transfer rate in Fastbytes is faster than in Standard protocol. For best
throughput, use Fastbytes protocol.
Printer to Computer (Advanced Status)
Your printer can send data to the computer. This capability lets the printer send status
messages to the computer on the parallel interface.
Parallel Modes 1 and 2
These are printer features that enhance reliability of data transfer from the host
page 8-15 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-8
Standard Parallel Connector
The standard IEEE 1284-B compliant parallel connector on the printer is a 36-pin
D-shell female receptacle, as shown.
1
18
36
19
Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize
When the printer is using the parallel interface and it receives an INIT* signal, it
initializes as follows (unless INIT* is disabled by a variable default setting):
• It prints data received before INIT*, and then initializes.
• It returns variable defaults to the values stored in the user default settings.
• It returns fixed default settings to the factory values.
• It retains permanent downloaded fonts and macros, but deletes temporary
downloaded fonts and macros.
• The link buffer remains intact.
• Variable default paper size settings become the active paper formatting size.
• If paper is loaded in a tray with auto size sensing, the printer resets the active
default paper formatting size to the size of the paper in the tray.
• INIT* is not honored when Hex Print is active.
• INIT* causes the parallel interface to go busy. The printer processes INIT*
when the parallel interface becomes active and all preceding characters have
been processed.
Computer-to-Printer Communications
This section describes how the parallel interface receives data from the computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-9
Standard Parallel Connector
The cabling in the following illustration supports Standard and Fastbytes protocols and
IEEE 1284 Nibble, Byte, and ECP protocols.
18
36
14
1
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
IEEE 1284-B
IEEE 1284-A
25-Pin
36-Pin
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
D-Shell
Connector
(Male)
13
1
19
25
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25-pin
connector to the 36-pin connector. The symbol * indicates an active low signal.
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
36-Pin
25-Pin
Connector
1284-B
Connector
Note: Lexmark IEEE 1284 compliant cables
are supported up to 20 feet. Cable lengths
greater than 20 feet are not supported. The
cable drawing to the left is a functional
representation of the Lexmark cables; it does
not reflect correct pairing of leads or unused
pairs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-10
The parallel interface consists of an 8-bit parallel data bus with the following
characteristics:
• Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector, as follows:
— The host system controls 12 lines, which it uses to send data and com-
mands to the printer.
— The printer controls five lines. The printer uses two lines to notify the com-
puter when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer
status.
• Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE* pulse.
• Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG* signals. Does not carry
out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG* signal. (The system can
carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is
low and after confirming the ACKNLG* signal is high.)
• Uses standard transistor-transistor logic (TTL) levels for all interface control
signals and input data. Interface conditions are based on TTL levels. All
printer outputs are totem-pole TTL devices. All printer input/output (I/O) are
devices with an internal pull-up resistor to 5 V. Rise and fall times of each
signal must be less than 1,500 nanoseconds (ns) without slope reversal.
Note: For best results, use the Lexmark 1.83 m (6 ft) parallel cable, part number
11K4078.
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25-pin
connector to the 36-pin connector. The symbol * indicates an active low signal.
The parallel interface consists of an 8-bit parallel data bus with the following
characteristics:
• Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector, as follows:
— The host system controls 12 lines, which it uses to send data and com-
mands to the printer.
— The printer controls five lines. The printer uses two lines to notify the com-
puter when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer
status.
• Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE* pulse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-11
• Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG* signals. Does not carry
out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG* signal. (The system can
carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is
low and after confirming the ACKNLG* signal is high.)
• Uses standard transistor-transistor logic (TTL) levels for all interface control
signals and input data. Interface conditions are based on TTL levels. All
printer outputs are totem-pole TTL devices. All printer input/output (I/O) are
devices with an internal pull-up resistor to 5 V. Rise and fall times of each
signal must be less than 1,500 nanoseconds (ns) without slope reversal.
Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence
The following illustration shows the typical data transfer sequence on the parallel
DATA1-8
A
B
C
STROBE*
BUSY
G
D
F
E
ACK*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-12
Table 8-1: Typical Parallel Interface Timings
Time
A
Name
Minimum/Maximum
Data setup to STROBE* low
STROBE* width
500 min.
500 min.
500 min.
500 max.
500 min.
–
B
C
Data hold after STROBE*
STROBE* low to BUSY high
ACKNLG* low until ACKNLG* high
D
E
1
F
ACKNLG* high to BUSY low
G
BUSY low and ACKNLG* high to STROBE* low
500 min.
1
Relationship of ACKNLG* and BUSY is not consistent
Fastbytes Protocol Data Transfer Sequence
Your printer is equipped with Fastbytes protocol, which is an enhanced parallel
interface protocol. Fastbytes protocol may give you a faster data transfer time on some
personal computers and operating systems. Fastbytes protocol is the printer default.
If you have data transmission problems between your personal computer and the
printer, change the parallel protocol to Standard. This causes the printer to operate in
IEEE-compliant compatibility mode.
The following illustration shows the typical timing sequence.
DATA 1-8
STROBE*
ACK*
BUSY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-13
Table 8-2: Fastbytes Timing Sequence
Time
T1
Name
Minimum/Maximum
Data setup to STROBE* low
STROBE* low to ACKNLG* low
ACKNLG* low to STROBE* high
STROBE* high to ACKNLG* high
ACKNLG* high and BUSY low to STROBE* low
ACKNLG* low to change data
STROBE* Timeout
400 min.
T2
0
T3
0
T4
0
T5
0
T6
50 min.
500 min.
T7
Max based on Auto Strobe Timer
ACKNLG* width
T8
400 min.
Equal to Data Setup Time
ACKNLG* to BUSY Skew
STROBE* high time
T9
+/ - 20 max.
400 min.
T10
Equal to Data Setup Time
Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)
The printer has a standard IEEE 1284-B compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I
compliant device. The optional RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card has an
IEEE 1284-C compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284-I compliant device.
Your printer could be considered an IEEE 1284-II compliant device if the “C” to “B”
style connector converter were used. The printer exceeds the maximum allowable
circuit capacitance for Level II interfaces. Compliance with IEEE 1284-II may slow data
flow control time slightly; however, all minimum and maximum criteria set forth in IEEE
1284 documentation will be met.
The printer supports:
• Compatibility mode
• Nibble mode
• Byte mode
• ECP mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-14
The printer also supports a Device ID function. When queried for its ID, the printer
returns the following information:
• Manufacturer
• Command set
• Model of printer
The LEXPARAL.EXE file is available from ftp.lexmark.com as /pub/driver/
technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE. Use your web browser to access ftp://
ftp.lexmark.com/pub/driver/technical_brief/LEXPARAL.EXE.
When the Advanced Status menu item is set to On, the printer supports IEEE 1284
communication. If the attached host computer does not support IEEE 1284
communication, you can turn Advanced Status to Off from the printer operator panel or
through MarkVision Professional, and SLCTIN* and AUTO FD XT* will be ignored.
Note: Excessive device queries and status checks (Nibble and Byte modes) will
slow printer performance.
You can get IEEE 1284 documentation by calling 1-800-678-IEEE (order number
DS02709).
Parallel Mode 1
Parallel Mode 1 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default
setting is On or Off depending on your printer model. See your printer documentation
for the factory default for your printer.
If the host side of the parallel interface is using open collector drivers to transmit data
to the printer, Parallel Mode 1 should be set to Off to increase reliability of data transfer.
Turning this mode Off equalizes all parallel interface signal impedances. On some
printer models, you can set Parallel Mode 1 to Off from the printer operator panel,
through MarkVision Professional, or through a PJL command. See your printer
documentation for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-15
Parallel Mode 2
Parallel Mode 2 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers. The factory default
setting is On.
The timing required by the printer is clearly indicated in “Standard Protocol Data
Transfer Sequence” on page 8-11. This is the classic Centronics interface timing.
By setting Parallel Mode 2 to Off from the printer operator panel, through MarkVision
Professional, or through a PJL command, the printer changes when data is valid.
Once Parallel Mode 2 is set to Off, the printer takes data from the host computer at the
trailing edge of STROBE. This is the last possible host driven transition where data
should be valid.
Note: You may find this feature helpful when having data transfer reliability
problems.
Signal Descriptions
STROBE Receiver for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the STROBE receiver for the Lexmark T640x.
Connector
Pin
74LVC161284
470 ±10%
GND
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-16
AUTOFD* Receiver for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the AUTOFD* receiver for the Lexmark T640x.
Connector
Pin
74LVC161284
470 pF ±10%
GND
DATA 1-8 Signal Driver/Receivers for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the DATA 1-8 signal driver/receivers for the Lexmark
T640x.
Connector
Pin
74LVC161284
150 pF ±20%
GND
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-17
ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE Drivers for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the ACKNLG*, ERROR*, SLCT, PE drivers for the
Lexmark T640x.
Connector
74LVC161284
Pin
150 pF ±20%
GND
BUSY Driver and INIT* Receiver for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the BUSY driver and the INIT* receiver for the
Lexmark T640x.
INIT*
1500 pF 20%
(input)
74LVC161284
±
GND
50K ohm
±5%
BUSY
(output)
74LVC161284
150 pF 20%
±
GND
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-18
SLCTIN* Receiver for the Lexmark T640x
The following diagram illustrates the SLCTIN* receiver for the Lexmark T640x.
Connector
Pin
74LVC161284
39 ohm 10%
1500 pF 20%
±
±
GND
Serial Interface
The serial interface allows data to flow back and forth between the computer and the
printer. However, the serial interface transfers data at a slower rate than the parallel
interface.
If a serial connector is required, you may be able to install an RS-232C Serial Interface
Card, an External Serial Adapter, or an RS-232C Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface
Card. See your printer documentation for more information.
Use RS-232C serial interface if the printer is more than 3.04 m (10 ft) from the
computer but less than 15.24 m (50 ft) away. (You can also use a 6.1 m (20 ft) Lexmark
cable to connect a printer and a computer located up to 20 feet apart.)
When using the serial interface, your printer has the following differences from the
serial interface on some other printers:
• The printer returns XON/XOFF with 2 stop bits in all cases.
• The printer does not support DTR inversion.
Using the RS-232C Serial Interface
This section describes how to use the RS-232C serial interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-19
How to Connect the RS-232C Serial Interface
Use Lexmark serial cable P/N 1038693 (15.24 m or 50 ft) to connect the serial
interface.
RS-232C Serial Cable Pin Assignments
The RS-232C serial cable appears as follows:
25-Pin
25-Pin
D-Shell
(Male)
D-Shell
(Female)
13
25
13
25
1
14
1
14
Printer
Side
Computer
Side
Table 8-3: Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments (RS-232C)
Pin
1
Signal
GND
TXD
Direction
Description
Frame Ground
2
Out
In
Transmit Data. The pin transmits data to your computer or
terminal.
3
4
5
6
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
Receive Data. The pin receives data from your computer or
terminal.
Out
In
Request to Send. The printer sets this signal high and the
signal remains high while the printer is on.
Clear to Send. This pin is optionally used for serial data flow
control protocol when in serial mode.
In
Data Set Ready. This pin is optionally used for data
validation, depending on the Honor DSR setting, or flow
control, depending on the Serial Protocol setting.
7
GND
DTR
Logic Ground
20
Out
Data Terminal Ready. This pin is optionally used for serial
data flow control protocol when in serial mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-20
Using an IBM-Compatible Personal Computer with Serial Interface RS-232C
Note: These instructions are for connecting the printer to an IBM-compatible
personal computer using a dual asynchronous adapter or an external print
server.
If you are using any of the above products, or if your computer has a 9-pin D shell
connector that conforms to the IBM designed 9-pin serial port, use a 9-pin to 25-pin
cable, such as IBM Part Number 6450242 (254 mm or 10 in.).
Null modem cables, such as Lexmark part number 1038693 [15.24 m (50 ft)], will
connect the converter cable to the printer. The illustration below represents the 25-pin
connectors for the RS-232C cable (1038693).
13
25
1
14
The following illustration shows the pin assignments for the 9-pin to 25-pin IBM EIA
RS-232C serial cables.
9 to 25 Pin Cable Adapter,
such as IBM 6450242 (10 in.)
Lexmark 1038693 (50 ft)
Shield
Shield
9 (F)
25 (M)
25 (F)
25 (M)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-21
Serial Communication Parameters (RS-232C)
The following paragraphs show acceptable values for serial communication
parameters.
Voltage Level Range
The maximum voltage level for control lines or data lines is +/- 25 positive V dc and
+/- 25 negative V dc. A timing or control line is active if the voltage is more than +3 V,
or inactive if the voltage is less than -3 V. The voltage reference point is the signal
ground on pin 7.
A data signal greater than +3 V means that the bit is a logical 0. A signal less than
-3 V means that the bit is logical 1.
For additional information, refer to Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and
Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange,
published by the Electronic Industries Association, publications EIA RS-232C and
EIA\TIA-232-E.
Serial Data Frame Considerations (RS-232C)
The computer sends serial data in data frames (also known as packets). You can
create 10-bit, 11-bit, and 12-bit data frames and set the serial data transfer parameter
so that each data frame contains 7 or 8 data bits. However, your printer is an 8-bit
printer; characters, controls, and all points addressable (APA) graphics need 8 bits of
data. If you select 7-bit data transfer, some unexpected characters might print.
Data Transmission
The list of acceptable data transfer rates (in bits per second) can be accessed from
the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your printer
documentation for more information.
Data Bits
The printer sends or receives 7 or 8 data bits in each transmission frame, depending
on which one is selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-22
Start and Stop Bits
The printer receives data with 1 start bit and either 1 or 2 stop bits. The printer always
sends 1 start and 2 stop bits.
Parity
There are four possible parity settings: Odd, Even, None, and Ignore.
Odd
The port expects to receive data frames with an odd number of logical
1’s per byte. The printer transmits XOFF and XON with odd parity. If the
printer detects a parity error, the port sends X'5F' to the printer instead
of the character sent by the host system.
Even
The port expects to receive data frames with an even number of logical
1’s per byte. The port transmits XOFF and XON with even parity. If the
port detects a parity error, the port sends an inverted question mark to
the printer instead of the character sent by the host system.
None
The port expects no parity bit when it receives data. The port transmits
XON and XOFF without parity bits.
Ignore
The port expects a parity bit when the port receives a data frame. The
port ignores the parity bit. The port uses even parity when it transmits
XON and XOFF.
Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents
the number of the serial port) the first time they detect a transmission error (parity,
overrun, or framing). The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be
reset from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. See your
printer documentation for more information.
If repeated serial errors occur, power the printer off and then back on to restore proper
serial operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-23
Data Flow Control
Data flow control is accomplished through the following lines:
• Data Set Ready (DSR)
• Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Five data flow control protocols are available:
• DTR pacing
• DTR/DSR
• XON/XOFF
• XON/XOFF/DTR
• XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR
Your printer supports two modes in which both hardware and software data flow
control protocols are performed. In XON/XOFF/DTR mode, the printer uses both
XON/XOFF and DTR pacing. When XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR mode is active, the printer
uses both XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR pacing.
Robust XON may be selected when the data flow control protocol for the serial port is
set to XON/XOFF, XON/XOFF/DTR, or XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR pacing. The printer
sends a continuous stream of XON signals to the host computer to indicate that the
serial port is ready to receive additional data. The signals continue as long as one of
the following conditions exist:
• No data has been received across the serial port in the last second.
• The last XON was accepted by the host computer.
• The printer is ready to receive data.
See your printer documentation for more information about selecting the protocol from
the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-24
Protocol (RS-232C)
flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is On.
Table 8-4: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR On
XON/XOFF Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
DTR Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
DTR/DSR Protocol
(Honor DSR On)
Printer
DTR
Always active
Flow control to computer
Flow control to
computer
DSR
CTS
Data validity
Data validity
Flow control (transmit
mode) to computer
(receive mode)
Ignored
Flow control from computer
Ignored
protocols when the Honor DSR setting is Off.
Table 8-5: Serial Link (All Protocols) with Honor DSR Off
XON/XOFF Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
DTR Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
DTR/DSR Protocol
(Honor DSR Off)
Printer Signal
DTR (Output)
Always active
Flow control to
computer
Flow control to computer
DSR (Input)
CTS (Input)
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored1
Flow control to computer
Ignored
Flow control from
computer1
1 These values are compatible with Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-25
DTR and DTR/DSR Protocol Timing (RS-232C)
Use DTR to pace the data flow from the computer. DTR goes from high to low to
indicate to the computer that the printer cannot receive more data when it detects the
following BUSY conditions:
• Buffer full
• Attendance error
• Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates DTR Protocol Timing.
1
2
3
Receive Data Valid
4
Legend:
1
2
The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer.
The DTR signal becomes active when initialization is complete, telling the computer that
the printer is ready to receive data.
3
4
When Honor DSR is On, the printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low
and discards the data. Only DTR/DSR is used for flow control from the printer to the host
computer.
DTR drops to tell the computer that the receive buffer is nearly full or that the printer is
busy and that data transmission should stop. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at
this time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer has sent a low DTR
signal, data could be lost.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-26
XON/XOFF Protocol Timing (RS-232C)
When you select this data flow control protocol, the printer sends an XOFF signal
when it detects the following BUSY conditions:
• Buffer full
• Attendance error
• Printer not in ready state
The following diagram illustrates XON/XOFF Protocol Timing.
1
RTS
DTR
DSR
2
3
Receive Data Valid
XON
4
XOFF
XON
XMT
RXD
5
6
Legend:
1
2
3
The RTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer.
The DTR signal becomes active at the completion of initialization.
The printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data. (This
is conditional depending on the setting of Honor DSR.)
4
5
6
After you power on the printer and DTR is active, the printer sends an XON signal to the
computer (DC1 control or X'11'). However, the computer does not need to detect this
initial XON before sending data to the printer, because the printer can be powered on
before the computer or terminal.
The printer sends an XOFF signal (DC3 control or X'13') to request that data
transmission end until the buffer clears. About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this
time. If the computer continues to send data after the printer sent an XOFF signal, data
could be lost.
The printer sends an XON signal to the computer when the buffer space is again
available. The serial interface is ready to receive more data.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-27
Serial Errors
The printer places an underscore character in the link buffer when it detects an error.
Some printers also display serial errors on the printer operator panel or through
MarkVision Professional as attendance messages, such as a 54 Standard Serial Error
or 54 Serial Option x Error (x represents the number of the serial port). Serial errors that
do not generate such an error message are:
• Serial Break
• Framing error received simultaneously as a Break
• Powering on an IBM-compatible personal computer connected to the printer
Serial Computer Configuration Recommendations (RS-232C)
For correct operation of the serial interface, your printer and your computer operating
system must be configured identically. The following is an example of how to configure
DOS for the printer using serial DTR protocol:
DOS:
From the DOS prompt, enter the following commands:
mode comy:9600,n,8,1,p
mode lptx :=comy
where x equals 1, 2, or 3, and y equals 1 or 2
Include these two command statements in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file on the computer
so they run each time your system starts operating.
Once this is set, to copy to the communications port again use the copy command:
copy 'filename' lptx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-28
Windows 95/98/Me/2000, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows XP:
For correct operation of the RS-232C serial interface, while setting up your
communications port, make sure you selected Hardware in the Flow Control field.
Selecting Hardware sets the communication to DTR protocol. See the following
sections for more information:
RS-232C Port Compatibility
The RS-232C port (on the RS-232C Serial Interface Card or the RS-232C
Serial/Parallel 1284-C Interface Card) is compatible with the Plug and Play External
COM Device Draft Specification, Rev. 0.86.
Devices that are compatible with Plug and Play COM can:
• Detect attachment of serial devices.
• Identify the device.
• Locate a driver for the device.
• Detect detachment of serial devices.
Network Support
Installing an internal print server enables you to connect your printer to a local area
network (LAN). The print server supports these network interfaces:
• The Token-Ring print server conforms to IEEE 802.5 using either IBM Cabling
System (STP) or unshielded twisted-pair cable, which meets the IBM Cabling
System Type 3 Media Specification (UTP).
• The Ethernet Combined 10BaseT and 10Base2 print server conforms to
IEEE 802.3 with a Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable for
the 10BaseT and conforms to IEEE 802.3 with an RG58 coaxial cable for the
10Base2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-29
• The Ethernet 10/100BaseTX print server conforms to the IEEE 802.3
standard for 10BaseT networks using Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-
pair (UTP) cabling, and to the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard for
100BaseTX networks using Category 5 UTP cabling.
For information on installing a print server in your printer, see your printer
documentation.
You may also connect your printer to a LAN by using an external print server. Use one
of the following:
• Lexmark MarkNet print servers
• IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters (IBM 4033)
Note: Network capabilities are standard on some printer models. See your printer
documentation for more information.
Input Buffer
Your printer has an input (link) buffer for each interface. The maximum size of the input
buffer depends upon the amount of RAM memory installed. The input buffers serve
the same purpose as a print spooler and can be allocated automatically by the printer.
The size of the input buffer may be modified or disabled from the operator panel
menus or through MarkVision Professional.
If NPAP is active on a port, two-thirds of the buffer memory is reserved for NPAP and
one-third is set aside for the input buffer. If NPAP is not active, all the memory is
available for the input buffer.
Table 8-8 shows the sizes automatically selected for the buffers when the buffer size
is set to Auto in the menus.
Table 8-6: Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes
Serial
Network
Memory Size
2MB
Parallel Buffer Size
Buffer Size Buffer Size LocalTalk USB Fax
12K
12K
24K
12K
12K
12K
12K
48K
48K
12K
12K
24K
12K
12K
12K
N/A
4MB
350K
350K
6MB
Note: MB represents 1,048,576 bytes. K represents 1024 bytes.
N/A means non-applicable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interfaces
8-30
Table 8-6: Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes (Continued)
Serial
Network
Memory Size
8, 10, or 12MB
16, 18, or 20MB
Parallel Buffer Size
Buffer Size Buffer Size LocalTalk USB Fax
48K
24K
24K
48K
48K
24K
24K
350K
1MB
48K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed)
1MB
1MB
1MB
2MB
1MB
1MB
1MB
2MB
24, 28, 32, or 34MB 192K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed) 150K
150K 1MB
300K 1MB
300K 1MB
36, 38, or 40MB
44MB or larger
384K (1MB if no optional adapter is installed) 300K
2MB 300K
Note: MB represents 1,048,576 bytes. K represents 1024 bytes.
N/A means non-applicable.
Note: When using serial communication, the printer signals the host computer to
stop transmitting bytes when the serial input buffer is within 640 bytes. In
addition, when XON/XOFF protocol is used, the printer signals the host
computer to stop transmitting when the serial input buffer is 384, 256, and
128 bytes from full.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-1
APPENDIX A: PCL Support
For detailed information about PCL emulation commands and how to select them, see
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESCE
Printer Reset
2-43
2-43
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESCY
Display Functions-On
Display Functions-Off
Print Test Page
ESCZ
ESCz
ESC&a#C
ESC&a#G
ESC&a#H
ESC&a#L
ESC&a#M
ESC&a#P
ESC&a#R
ESC&a#V
ESC&b#M
ESC&c#T
ESC&d@
ESC&d#A
ESC&d#D
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns)
Duplex Page Side Selection
Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
Set Left Margin
Set Right Margin
Print Direction
Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows)
Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints)
Monochrome Print Mode
Character Text Path Direction
Underline-Disable
Number of Collated Copies
Underline-Enable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-2
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESC&f#F
Set Universal Height
Set Universal Width
Set Universal Feed Direction
Set Universal Custom Name
Push / Pop Cursor Position
Macro Control
ꢀ
ESC&f#G
ESC&f#O
ESC&f#W
ESC&f#S
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESC&f#X
ESC&f#Y
Set Macro ID
ESC&k#G
ESC&k#H
ESC&k#S
ESC&k#W
ESC&l#A
ESC&l#C
ESC&l#D
ESC&l#E
ESC&l#F
ESC&l#G
ESC&l#H
ESC&l#L
ESC&l#O
ESC&l#M(b)
ESC&l#P
ESC&l#S
ESC&l1T
ESC&l#U
ESC&l#X
ESC&l#Z
Set Line Termination
Set Horizontal Motion Index
Select Primary and Secondary Pitch
Text Scale Mode
Page Size
Set Vertical Motion Index
Set Line Spacing
Set Top Margin
Set Text Length
Set Output Bin
Paper Source
Skip Perforation
Select Orientation
Paper Type
Set Page Length
Simplex/Duplex Print
Job Separation
Long-Edge Offset Registration
Number of Copies
Short-Edge Offset Registration
Alphanumeric ID
ESC&n#W [operation]
[string id]
ESC&p#C
Palette Control
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-3
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESC&p#I
ESC&p#S
ESC&p#X[data]
ESC&r#F
ESC&s#C
ESC&t#P
ESC&u#D
ESC(#
Palette Control ID
ꢀ
Select Palette
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Transparent Print Data
Flush All Pages
End-Of-Line Text Wrap
Text Parsing Method
Unit of Measure
Primary Font Symbol Set
Select Primary Download Font (by Font ID)
Select Default Primary Font
Define Symbol Set
ESC(#X
ESC(3@
ESC(f#W[data]
ESC(s#B
ESC(s#H
ESC(s#P
ESC(s#S
ESC(s#T
Primary Font Stroke Weight
Primary Font Pitch
Primary Font Spacing
Primary Font Style
Primary Font Typeface Selection
Primary Font Height (Point Size)
Load Character
ESC(s#V
ESC(s#W[data]
ESC)#
Secondary Font Symbol Set
Select Secondary Download Font (by Font ID)
Select Default Secondary Font
Secondary Font Stroke Weight
Secondary Font Pitch
ESC)#X
ESC)3@
ESC)s#B
ESC)s#H
ESC)s#P
ESC)s#S
ESC)s#T
Secondary Font Spacing
Secondary Font Style
Secondary Font Typeface Selection
Secondary Font Height (Point Size)
Load Font Header
ESC)s#V
ESC)s#W[data]
ESC*b#M
Set Raster Compression Mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-4
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESC*b#V[data]
ESC*b#W[data]
ESC*b#Y
Transfer Raster Data (by Plane)
Transfer Raster Data (by Row / Block)
Y Offset
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESC*c#A
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units)
Set Font ID
ESC*c#B
ESC*c#D
ESC*c#E
Set Character Code
ESC*c#F
Font Control
ESC*c#G
Area Fill ID
2-46,
ESC*c#H
Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size (in Inches)
GL/2 Vertical Plot Size (in Inches)
Fill Rectangular Area
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESC*c#K
ESC*c#L
ESC*c#P
ESC*c#Q
Pattern Control
ESC*c#R
Symbol Set ID Code
ESC*c#S
Symbol Set Control
ESC*c0T
Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints)
User-Defined Pattern
ESC*c#V
ESC*c#W[data]
ESC*c#X
Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints)
Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints)
Logical Operation
ESC*c#Y
ESC*l#O
ESC*l#R
ESC*l#W[data]
ESC*m#W[data]
ESC*o#M(b)
ESC*o#W[data]
ESC*p#P
Pixel Placement
Color Lookup Tables
Download Dither Matrix
Print Quality
Driver Configuration Command
Push / Pop Palette
ESC*p#R
Set Pattern Reference Point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-5
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESC*p#X
ESC*p#Y
ESC*r#A
ESC*r#F
ESC*r#S
ESC*r#T
ESC*r#U
ESC*rB
Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units)
Start Raster Graphics
2-54
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Raster Graphics Presentation Mode
Raster Width (Source)
Raster Height (Source)
Simple Color
End Raster Graphics (Version B)
End Raster Graphics (Version C)
Inquire Status Readback Entity
Free Space
ESC*rC
ESC*s#I
ESC*s1M
ESC*s#T
ESC*s#U
ESC*s#X
ESC*t#H
ESC*t#I
Set Status Readback Location Type
Set Status Readback Location Unit
Echo
Raster Width Destination
Gamma Correction
ESC*t#J
Render Algorithm
ESC*t#R
ESC*t#V
ESC*g#W
ESC*v#A
ESC*v#B
ESC*v#C
ESC*v#I
Raster Resolution
Raster Height Destination
Set Raster Configuration
Color Component One
Color Component Two
Color Component Three
Assign Color Index
ESC*v#N
ESC*v#O
ESC*v#S
ESC*v#T
ESC*v#W[data]
Source Transparency Mode
Pattern Transparency Mode
Foreground Color
Select Current Pattern
Configure Image Data
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-6
Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
Page numbers reference command descriptions
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
ESC*i#W[data]
ESC9
Viewing Illuminant
Clear Horizontal Margins
Half Line-Feed
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ESC
=
ESC%#A
ESC%#B
Enter PCL Emulation
Enter GL/2 Language
Note: The values of -1, 2, and 3 are not
supported
by any of the printers included in this document.
ESC%—12345X
Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL
ꢀ
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands
ꢀ Supported
Page numbers reference command
descriptions.
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
2-57
2-56
AA
AC
AD
AR
AT
BR
BZ
CF
CI
Arc Absolute
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Anchor Corner
Define Alternate Font
Arc Relative
Arc Absolute Three Point
Bezier Relative
Bezier Absolute
Character Fill
Circle
CO
CP
Comment
Character Plot
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-7
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Page numbers reference command
descriptions.
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
2-56
2-56
CR
DF
DI
Color Range
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Default
Absolute Direction
Relative Direction
Define Label Terminator
Define Variable Text Path
Edge Rectangle Absolute
Edge Polygon
DR
DT
DV
EA
EP
ER
ES
EW
FI
Edge Rectangle Relative
Extra Space
Edge Wedge
Primary Font
FN
FP
FP
FT
FT
FT
IN
Secondary Font
Fill Polygon, Odd/Even
Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding
Fill Type
Fill Type - 22
Fill Type - 9
Initialize
IP
Input P1 and P2
Input Relative P1 and P2
Input Window
IR
IW
LA
LB
LO
LO
LT
Line Attributes
Label, Default Terminator = ‘03’x
Label Origin
Uses PCL Label Origin
Line Type
LM
MC
Label Mode
Logical Operation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-8
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Page numbers reference command
descriptions.
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
2-57
NP
PA
PC
PD
PE
PM
PP
PR
PU
PW
RA
RF
RO
RR
RT
SA
SB
SC
SD
SI
Number of Pens
Plot Absolute
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Pen Color
Pen Down
Polyline Encoded
Polygon Mode
Pixel Placement
Plot Relative
Pen Up
Pen Width
Fill Rectangle Absolute
Define Raster Fill
Rotate Coordinate System
Fill Rectangle Relative
Arc Relative Three Point
Select Alternate Font
Scalable/Bitmapped Fonts
Scale
Define Standard Font
Absolute Character Size
Character Slant
SL
SM
SP
SR
SS
SV
SV
TD
TM
Symbol Mode
Select Pen
Relative Character Size
Select Standard Font
Screened Vectors
Screened Vectors - 9, level
Transparent Data
Threshold Matrix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Support
A-9
Table A-2: GL/2 Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Page numbers reference command
descriptions.
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Command
Function
Page
TR
Transparency Mode
User Defined Line
Fill Wedge
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
UL
WG
WU
Pen Width Units
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-1
APPENDIX B: PJL Support
The following tables list PJL commands and identify printers that support them.
For detailed information about PJL commands, see “Printer Job Language” on
page 3-1. All commands may not have a full description.
Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your Lexmark
printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers.
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Printer
Model
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
AUTOCONT
Page
3-12
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
AUTOSELECT
BINDING
3-12
3-12
3-12
BITSPERPIXEL
CLEARABLEWARNINGS
CONTEXTSWITCH
COPIES
3-12
3-13
3-13
CPLOCK
DENSITY
DISKLOCK
DUPLEX
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-13
ECONOMODE
FORMATTERNUMBER
FORMLINES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-2
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Printer
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Model
Variable Name
HOLD
Page
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HOLDKEY
HOLDTYPE
IMAGEADAPT
INTRAY1
INTRAY2
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
INTRAY3
INTRAY4
INTRAY5
INTRAY1SIZE
INTRAY2SIZE
INTRAY3SIZE
INTRAY4SIZE
INTRAY5SIZE
IOBUFFER
IOSIZE
JOBATTR
JOBNAME
JOBOFFSET
LANG
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
LOWTONER
MANUALFEED
MEDIASOURCE
MEDIATYPE
MPTRAY
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
ORIENTATION
OUTBIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-3
Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Printer
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Model
Variable Name
PAGEPROTECT
PAPER
Page
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-18
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PARALLEL
PASSWORD
PERSONALITY
POWERSAVE
POWERSAVETIME
PRINTQUALITY
QTY
3-18
RENDERMODE
REPRINT
3-18
3-18
3-18
RESOLUTION
RESOURCESAVE
RESOURCESAVESIZE
RET
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-19
TIMEOUT
USERNAME
WIDEA4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-4
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LACTIVEBINRESET
LADVANCEDSTATUS
LALARMCONTROL
LAUTOCRLF
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-22
3-22
3-22
3-22
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LAUTOLFCR
LBLANKPAGES
LBONDLENGTH
LBONDLOADING
LBONDOUTBIN
LBONDTEXTURE
LBONDWEIGHT
LBWLOCK
LCANCEL
LCARDSTOCKLENGTH
LCARDSTOCKLOADING
LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN
LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE
LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT
LCOLLATION
LCOLORCORRECTION
LCOLOREDLENGTH
LCOLOREDLOADING
LCOLOREDOUTBIN
LCOLOREDTEXTURE
LCOLOREDWEIGHT
LCOLORMODEL
LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-5
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH
LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT
LCUSTOMPAPERFEED
LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME
LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT
LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME
LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT
LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME
LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT
LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-25
3-25
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-27
3-27
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-6
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT
LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME
LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT
LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH
LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING
LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA
LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME
LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN
LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE
LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT
LDOWNLOADTARGET
LDRYTIMEDELAY
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS
LENVELOPEENHANCE
LENVELOPELENGTH
LENVELOPEOUTBIN
LENVELOPETEXTURE
LENVELOPEWEIGHT
LESCCHAR
LFAXRESOLUTION
LFAXREDIAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-7
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY
LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG
LFEEDERPAPERTYPE
LGLOSSYLOADING
LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN
LGLOSSYTEXTURE
LGLOSSYWEIGHT
LHOLEPUNCHALARM
LHOLEPUNCHMODE
LHONORINIT
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-33
3-33
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS
LIMAGECONTRAST
LIMAGEENHANCE
LIMAGEENHANCETYPE
LIMAGEORIENTATION
LIMAGESMOOTHING
LINFEEDER
LINFEEDERSIZE
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
LINKALERT
LINMPFEEDERSIZE
LJAMRECOVERY
LLABELSLENGTH
LLABELSLOADING
LLABELSOUTBIN
LLABELSTEXTURE
LLABELSWEIGHT
LLEFTMARGINOFFSET
LLETTERHEADLENGTH
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-8
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LLETTERHEADLOADING
LLETTERHEADOUTBIN
LLETTERHEADTEXTURE
LLETTERHEADWEIGHT
LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT
LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS
LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE
LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT
LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS
LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE
LMANUALENVELOPESIZE
LMANUALENVELOPETYPE
LMANUALPAPERSIZE
3-34
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-36
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LMANUALPAPERTYPE
LMAXSTATUSMSG
LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE
LMULTIPAGEBORDER
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-38
3-38
LMULTIPAGEORDER
LMULTIPAGEPRINT
LMULTIPAGEVIEW
LNPAP
LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-9
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME
LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME
LOUTBINCONFIG
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-42
3-43
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LOVERFLOWOUTBIN
LOVERFLOWTIMER
LPAGECOUNT
LPAGEMODE
LPAPERSOURCE
LPICTUREGRADE
LPLAINLENGTH
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LPLAINOUTBIN
LPLAINTEXTURE
LPLAINWEIGHT
LPOWERSAVER
LPPDS
LPPDSFORMLINES
LPPDSLINESPERINCH
LPREPRINTEDLENGTH
LPREPRINTEDLOADING
LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN
LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE
LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT
LPRINTBUFFER
LPRINTHEADIDLETIME
LPRINTERUSAGE
LPRINTMENUSBUTTON
LPRINTQUALITY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-10
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LPUNCH
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-46
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LREAROUTBINNAME
LREPEATPRINTLIMIT
LRESET
LRESOURCESAVE
LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET
LSCREENING
LSEPARATORSHEETS
LSEPARATORSOURCE
LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME
LSTAPLE
LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM
LSTAPLETESTBIN
LSTAPLETESTSOURCE
LSTROKEWIDTH
LSUBSTITUTESIZE
LTHINCOAT
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LTOPBINROTATE
LTOPMARGINOFFSET
LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH
LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN
LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE
LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPEPAPER
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-11
Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions
and are listed for supported variables only.
Default values are listed for exceptions only.
Variable Name
Page
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
LTRAY1AUTOSIZE
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LTRAY2AUTOSIZE
LTRAY3AUTOSIZE
LTRAY4AUTOSIZE
LTRAY5AUTOSIZE
LTRAY1PAPERTYPE
LTRAY2PAPERTYPE
LTRAY3PAPERTYPE
LTRAY4PAPERTYPE
LTRAY5PAPERTYPE
LTRAY1RENUMBER
LTYPE1FONTS
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LUSDEFAULTS
Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
FONTNUMBER
FONTSOURCE
PITCH
Page
3-48
3-48
3-48
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-12
Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
PTSIZE
Page
3-48
3-48
ꢀ
ꢀ
SYMSET
Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
Page
LA4WIDTH
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-49
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-50
3-51
3-51
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LASSIGNFEEDER
LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE
LASSIGNMANUALPAPER
LASSIGNMPFEEDER
LASSIGNTRAY1
LASSIGNTRAY2
LASSIGNTRAY3
LASSIGNTRAY4
LASSIGNTRAY5
LBITMAPROUNDING
LCOLOREXTENSIONS
LFONTCOMPATIBILITY
LFONTPRIORITY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-13
Table B-5: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions and
are listed for supported variables only.
Variable Name
JAMRECOVERY
PRTPSERRS
ADOBEMBT
Page
3-51
3-51
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Table B-6: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
Page
LPICTUREGRADE
LPSFONTPRIORITY
3-52
3-52
ꢀ
ꢀ
Table B-7: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
LDESCRIPTION
LRWLOCK
Page
3-53
3-53
3-53
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LWLOCK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-14
Table B-8: Status Readback Commands
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
Command Name
Dinquire
Echo
Page
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-58
3-59
3-60
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Info
Inquire
Ustatus
Ustatusoff
Table B-9: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference variable descriptions.
Variable Name
DEVICE
JOB
Page
3-60
3-60
3-60
3-60
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PAGE
TIMED
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-15
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page
Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
PPDS Font Error
30014
50 PPDS Font Error
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Insufficient Collation Area
30016
30016
30016
30016
30016
30016
30017
30018
30018
30018
30018
30018
37 Insufficient Collation
Area
Intervention Required -
Insufficient Defragment Memory
37 Insufficient Defrag
Memory
Intervention Required -
Insufficient Memory
37 Insufficient Memory
Intervention Required -
Memory Full
38 Memory Full
Intervention Required -
Held Jobs May Not Be Restored
Held Jobs May Not Be
Restored
Intervention Required -
Configuration Change
57 Configuration Change
Intervention Required -
Complex Page
39 Complex Page
Intervention Required -
Standard Serial Error
54 Standard Serial Error
Intervention Required -
Serial Option Error
54 Serial Option <slot #>
error
Intervention Required -
Parallel Error
54 Parallel Error
Intervention Required -
Network Software Error
54 Std Network Software
Error
Intervention Required -
Standard Serial Fax
Connection Lost
54 Std Ser Fax Connection
Lost
Intervention Required -
Standard Serial Disabled
30018
30018
30018
56 Standard Serial Disabled
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Serial Option Disabled
56 Serial <slot #> Port
Disabled
Intervention Required -
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
Std Parallel Port Disabled
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-16
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page
Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
Parallel Port Disabled
30018
56 Parallel Port Disabled
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Parallel Port Error
30018
30018
30019
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
Intervention Required -
Standard USB Disabled
56 Standard USB Port
Disabled
Intervention Required -
Resource Save Off
Deficient Memory
35 Res Save Off Deficient
Memory
Intervention Required -
Insufficient Fax Buffer
30026
30027
30027
30029
30031
55 Insufficient Fax Buffer
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Std Par ENA Connection Lost
54 Std Par ENA Connection
Lost
Intervention Required -
Std Parallel Port Disabled
56 Std Parallel Port Disabled
Intervention Required -
Resolution Reduced
36 Resolution Reduced
Intervention Required -
Print Jobs on Disk Request
Print Jobs on Disk? or
Print Jobs on Disk. Go/
Stop?
Intervention Required -
Restore Held Jobs. Go/Stop?
30031
30034
30035
30035
30036
30036
30036
30036
Restore Held Jobs. Go/
Stop?
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Short Paper
34 Short Paper
Intervention Required -
Flash Full
52 Flash Full
Intervention Required -
Disk Full
62 Disk Full
Intervention Required -
Defective Flash
51 Defective Flash
53 Unformatted Flash
61 Defective Disk
63 Unformatted Disk
Intervention Required -
Unformatted Flash
Intervention Required -
Defective Disk
Intervention Required -
Unformatted Disk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-17
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page
Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
Scheduled Maintenance
30075
80 Scheduled Maintenance
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Resource Save Off
Deficient Memory
30076
35 Res Save Off Deficient
Memory
Intervention Required -
Insufficient Collation Area
30076
30107
30107
30107
30107
30107
30107
30112
30112
30112
30112
30112
30113
30113
32001
37 Insufficient Collation
Area
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Empty Hole Punch Box
Empty Hole Punch Box
Intervention Required -
Empty Box M
Empty Box M
Intervention Required -
Insert Box M
Insert Box M
Intervention Required -
Insert Staple Cartridge
Insert Staple Cartridge
Insert Stapler
Intervention Required -
Insert Stapler
Intervention Required -
Priming Failed
Priming Failed, Retry. Go/
Stop?
Intervention Required -
Network x Software Error
54 Network x Software Error
56 Serial Port x Disabled
54 Serial Option x Error
Intervention Required -
Serial Port x Disabled
Intervention Required -
Serial Option x Error
Intervention Required -
Serial x Fax Connection Lost
54 Ser x Fax Connection
Lost
Intervention Required -
USB Port Disabled
56 USB Port x Disabled
Intervention Required -
Parallel x ENA Connection Lost
54 Par x ENA Connection
Lost
Intervention Required -
Parallel x Port Disabled
56 Parallel Port x Disabled
Intervention Required -
Disk Operation Failed
Jobs on Disk
Operation Failed Jobs on
Disk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-18
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page
Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
Disk Operation Failed
Faxes on Disk
32001
Operation Failed Faxes on
Disk
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Flash Full
32002
32002
32015
32030
32052
32052
32052
32056
32056
35075
35075
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
52 Flash Full
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Disk Full
62 Disk Full
Intervention required:
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
Disk Corrupted. Reformat?
58 Too Many Flash Options
53 Unformatted Flash
63 Unformatted Disk
Intervention Required -
Too Many Flash Options Installed
Intervention Required -
Unformatted Flash
Intervention Required -
Unformatted Disk
Intervention Required:
Unsupported Disk Format
64 Unsupported Disk
Format
Intervention Required -
Defective Flash
51 Defective Flash
Intervention Required -
Defective Disk
61 Defective Disk
Intervention Required -
Scheduled Maintenance
80 Scheduled Maintenance
81 Scheduled Maintenance
80 Fuser Maintenance
80 Fuser Life Warning
80 Belt Life Warning
Intervention Required -
Scheduled Maintenance
Intervention Required -
Fuser Maintenance
Intervention Required -
Fuser Life Warning
Intervention Required -
Belt Life Warning
Intervention Required -
Fuser/Belt Life Warning
80 Fuser/Belt Life Warning
80 Fuser Exhausted
Intervention Required -
Fuser Exhausted
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-19
Table B-10: PJL Messages for Auto-Continuable Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page
Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
Belt Exhausted
40038
80 Belt Exhausted
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Fuser/Belt Exhausted
40038
40038
80 Fuser/Belt Exhausted
83 ITU Maintenance
Intervention Required -
ITU Maintenance
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page Code
Return String
Intervention Required -
30 Coating Roll Missing
40010
40010
40010
40010
40021
40021
40021
30 Coating Roll Missing
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
1
Intervention Required -
30 XXXX Print Unit Missing
1
30 XXXX Print Unit Missing
Intervention Required -
Insert Hole Punch Box
Insert Hole Punch Box
Insert PC Cartridge
Intervention Required -
Insert PC Cartridge
1
Intervention Required -
Cartridge Life Expired
Cartridge Life Expired XXXX
1
Intervention Required -
Cartridge Life Warning
Cartridge Life Warning XXXX
Cover Open, Close Top
Covers, Close Door, or Insert
Cartridge
Intervention Required -
Printer Upper Door Open
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-20
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Page Code
Message
Return String
Close Cover
Intervention Required -
Printer Cover Open
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Close Toner Box Cover
Close Cover A
Intervention Required -
Close Deflector G
Close Deflector G
Intervention Required -
Defective Print Cartridge
31 Defective Print Cartridge
31 Defective Cartridge XXXX
1
Intervention Required -
Defective Ink Cartridge
1
Intervention Required -
Missing Cartridge
31 Missing Cartridge XXXX
Intervention Required -
Missing Printhead
31 Missing Printhead
Intervention Required -
Unsupported Print Cartridge
32 Unsupported Print
Cartridge
1
Intervention Required -
Unsupported XXXX Cartridge
32 Unsupported XXXX
Cartridge
1
Intervention Required -
Unsupported Cartridge
32 Unsupported Cartridge
Intervention Required -
Unsupported Printhead
32 Unsupported Printhead
40 Tray x Size Sense Error
41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray
Intervention Required -
Tray Size Sense Error
Intervention Required -
Open Bin Exit Tray
Intervention Required -
Change Cartridge
Invalid Refill
Change Cartridge Invalid
Refill
Intervention Required -
Open Cover
40021
40021
Open Cover
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Open Rear Door
Open Rear Door
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-21
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Page Code
Message
Return String
Intervention Required -
Close Front Door
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40021
40022
40027
40027
40028
40028
Close Front Door
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Close Side Door
Close Side Door
Intervention Required -
Close Finisher Door
Close Finisher Door
Close Finisher Side Door
Close Finisher Top Cover
Close Door <d>
Intervention Required -
Close Finisher Side Door
Intervention Required -
Close Finisher Top Cover
Intervention Required -
Close Door <d>
Intervention Required -
Close Cover <c>
Close Cover <c>
Intervention Required -
Close Tray x Top Cover
Close Tray x Top Cover
Insert Print Cartridge
2xx Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Insert Print Cartridge
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Check Tray Connection
Check Tray <source #>
Connection
Intervention Required -
Install Tray x or Cancel Job
Install Tray x or Cancel Job
Intervention Required -
Reattach Envelope Feeder
Reattach Envelope Feeder
Intervention Required -
Install Env Feeder or
Cancel Job
Install Env Feed or Cancel
Job
Intervention Required -
Reattach MP Feeder
40028
40029
Reattach MP Feeder
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Reattach Output Bin
Reattach Output Bin <bin #>
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-22
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Page Code
Message
Return String
Intervention Required -
Reattach Bins
40029
40029
40029
40029
40030
40030
40030
40030
40030
40036
40037
40037
40038
Reattach Bins <bin #x - bin
#y>
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Install Bin x or Cancel Job
Install Bin x or Cancel Job
Check Finisher Installation
Check Mailbox Installation
33 Tray x Config Error
Intervention Required -
Check Finisher Installation
Intervention Required -
Check Mailbox Installation
Intervention Required -
Tray Config Error
Intervention Required -
Input Config Error
58 Input Config Error
Intervention Required -
Too Many Trays Attached
58 Too Many Trays Attached
58 Too Many Bins Attached
58 Too Many Disks Installed
58 Too Many Disks Installed
31 PerfectFinish Missing
87 PerfectFinish Empty
88 Toner Low
Intervention Required -
Too Many Bins Attached
Intervention Required -
Too Many Disks Installed
Intervention Required -
Too Many Disks Installed
Intervention Required -
PerfectFinish Missing
Intervention Required -
PerfectFinish Empty
Intervention Required -
Toner Low
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-23
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Page Code
Message
Return String
Intervention Required -
Toner Low
40038
88 Yellow Toner Low
ꢀ
88 Magenta Toner Low
88 Cyan Toner Low
88 Black Toner Low
88 Color Print Cartridge Low
88 Black Print Cartridge Low
88 Photo Print Cartridge Low
88 Yellow Toner Empty
88 Magenta Toner Empty
88 Cyan Toner Empty
88 Black Toner Empty
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
40038
84 Black Photo Dev Life
Warning
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning
84 Color Photo Dev Life
Warning
Intervention Required -
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
84 All Photo Devs Exhausted
Intervention Required -
84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted
84 Black Photo Dev
Exhausted
Intervention Required -
Cartridge Low
88 Cartridge Low
<CMYK>
Intervention Required -
Replace PC Kit
Replace PC Kit
Intervention Required -
Replace PC Kit
To Continue
Replace PC Kit To Continue
Intervention Required -
Replace Toner Cartridge
40038
40038
Replace Toner Cartridge
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Replace Toner Cartridge To
Continue
Replace Toner To Continue
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-24
Table B-11: PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Page Code
Message
Return String
Intervention Required -
Replace Oil Coating Roll
40038
40039
40040
40041
40048
40049
40050
40050
40087
40088
40089
40090
40095
40095
40096
40096
40101
Replace Oil Coating Roll
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Cartridge Empty
89 Cartridge Empty
<CMYK>
Intervention Required -
Load Staples
Load Staples
Intervention Required -
Priming Failed. Retry?
Priming Failed. Retry?
OPMSG message
STMSG message
Replace Fuser
Intervention Required -
OPMSG
Intervention Required -
STMSG
Intervention Required -
Replace Fuser
Intervention Required -
Replace Transfer Kit
Replace Transfer Kit
59 Incompatible Bin x
59 Incompatible Duplex
59 Incompatible Tray x
Intervention Required -
Incompatible Bin x
Intervention Required -
Incompatible Duplex
Intervention Required -
Incompatible Tray x
Intervention Required -
Incompatible Envelope Feeder
59 Incompatible Envelope
Feeder
Intervention Required -
Check Duplex Connection
Check Duplex Connection
Install Duplex or Cancel Job
Close Duplex Door
Intervention Required -
Install Duplex or Cancel Job
Intervention Required -
Duplex Cover Open
Intervention Required -
Insert Duplex Option
Insert Duplex Option
Load Staples
Intervention Required -
Load Staples
1
XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK, where CMYK denotes Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow, and Black cartridges, respectively.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-25
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page Code
Return String*
Intervention Required -
Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
3-73 30034
34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed
3-73 30034
3-73 40019
3-73 40019
3-73 40019
3-73 40019
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual
Feed
Intervention Required -
Remove Paper Standard Bin
Remove Paper Standard Bin
Intervention Required -
Remove Paper Outbin <bin #>
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin
#>
Intervention Required -
Remove Paper All Output Bins
Remove Paper All Output Bins
Intervention Required -
Remove Paper <linked set bin
name>
Remove Paper <linked set bin
name>
Intervention Required -
Check <Source> Paper Guide
3-73 4100x
Check <source> Paper Guide
34 Incorrect Media
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Incorrect Media
Intervention Required -
Load Request
Load <source>
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
Intervention Required -
Load Manual Request
Load Manual
ꢀ
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
<type> <size>
* See your printer documentation for return string messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-26
Table B-12: PJL Messages for Paper Handling (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Status
Message
Page Code
Return String*
Intervention Required -
Change Request
Change <source>
<Custom Type Name>
<Custom String>
<size>
ꢀ
<type> <size>
Intervention Required -
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
3-73 412yy
Insert Duplex Pages & Press Go.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Insert Tray Request
Insert Tray <source #>
x represents an input source code. For more information, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes”
on page 3-74.
yy represents a media size code. For more information, see “Table 3-17: Media Size
Codes” on page 3-74.
* See your printer documentation for return string messages.
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4200x
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4201x
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4202x
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-27
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4203x
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4204x
4205x
4206x
4207x
4208x
4209x
4210x
4211x
4220x
4221x
4222x
4230x
4231x
4232x
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-28
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4233x
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4234
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
424yx
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4241wy
4242wy
4243w
4244wy
4245w
4246w
4247wy
4248w
4249w
4250w
4250x
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4251wy
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-29
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4251x
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4252w
4253w
4254wy
4255
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4256w
4257w
4258w
4259wy
4260w
4260x
4261w
4261x
427zx
4271
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-30
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4272
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4273
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4280w
4280x
4281w
4281x
4282w
4282x
4283w
4283x
4284w
4284x
4285w
4286w
4287
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-31
Table B-13: PJL Messages for Paper Jams (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
Page
Status Code
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4288
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
Intervention Required -
Paper Jam
w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover. The
door or cover needs to be opened.
x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer.
y represents the tray number.
z represents the bin number.
Table B-14: Service Errors
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message description.
Message
Page
Error Code
ALL SERVICE MESSAGES
50000
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-32
Table B-15: Device Attendance Messages
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference message descriptions.
Message
RDYMSG
OPMSG
STMSG
Page
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
Command
Page
3-82
3-30
3-82
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-83
3-89
3-89
3-90
3-91
LBEEP
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LDOWNLOADTARGET
LPORTROTATE
LPRINT testpage
• LPRINTDIRECTORY
• LPRINTTESTPAGE
• LPRINTMENUS
• LPRINTPCLFONTS
• LPRINTPSFONTS
LESCAPECHAR
LFAX PHONENUMBER
LOPENFILE
LCLOSEFILE
LREADFILE
LWRITEFILE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PJL Support
B-33
Table B-16: Lexmark Unique PJL Commands (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
Command
Page
LRUNFILE
3-91
3-92
3-92
3-92
3-92
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LRENAMEFILE
LDELETEFILE
LFORMAT
LDEFRAG
Table B-17: File and Device Protection Commands
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference command descriptions.
Command
Page
LDECLARE LRESOURCE
LDELETEPASSWORD
3-96
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
LQUERYSEED
LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-1
APPENDIX C: PostScript Support
The following tables list PostScript commands and identify printers that support them.
For detailed information about PostScript emulation, see “PostScript Emulation” on
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
Operator Name
appletalktype
buildtime
Page
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-3
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
byteorder
checkpassword
currentfilenameextend
currentmanualduplexmode
currentuniversalsize
defaulttimeouts
deletefile
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21
4-22
devcontrol
devdismount
devforall
devformat
devmount
devstatus
diskonline
diskstatus
displayoperatormsg
doidlefonts
dojamrecovery
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-2
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
Operator Name
doprinterrors
doret
Page
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-3
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
dostartpage
dosysstart
duplexer
duplexmode
enginesync
file
filenameforall
fileposition
firstside
fontnonzerowinding
hardwareiomode
idlefonts
ignoresize
initializedisk
jobname
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-7
jobsource
jobtimeout
manualfeed
manualfeedtimeout
newsheet
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-7
pagecount
pagesprinted
papertray
printername
product
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
PS2fonts
PS3fonts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-3
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
Operator Name
quiet
Page
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-36
4-37
4-37
4-37
4-38
4-38
4-39
4-39
4-40
4-40
4-40
4-41
4-41
4-41
4-3
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ramsize
realformat
renamefile
resolution
revision
sccbatch
sccinteractive
setcoverpage
setdefaulttimeouts
setdoidlefonts
setdojamrecovery
setdoprinterrors
setdoret
setdostartpage
setdosysstart
setduplexmode
setenginesync
setethernetaddress
setfilenameextend
setfileposition
sethardwareiomode
setidlefonts
setignoresize
setjobtimeout
setmanualduplexmode
setpapertray
setprintername
setquiet
4-42
4-42
4-8
4-43
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-4
Table C-1: Supplemental Operators (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference operator descriptions.
Operator Name
setresolution
Page
4-44
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-45
4-4
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
setsccbatch
setsccinteractive
setsoftwareiomode
settumble
setuniversalsize
setuserdiskpercent
softwareiomode
tumble
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-47
userdiskpercent
waittimeout
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
BeginPage
4-48
4-48
4-48
4-48
ꢀ
ꢀ
Collate
DeferredMediaSelection
DeviceRenderingInfo
• Screening
— ColorGrade
— PictureGrade
— IET
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
— IETImagesOnly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-5
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
4-51
4-51
4-51
4-51
4-52
4-52
— IETPictureGrade
— None
ꢀ
ꢀ
• TonerSaver
• PictureGrade
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
• ImageEnhancement
• PrintDarkness
• AutoMediaType
• EdgeToEdge
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
• DefaultPoliciesPageSize
• SubstituteSize
• Type
• ColorCorrection
• ImageBrightness
• ImageContrast
• PrintQuality
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Duplex
EndPage
ExitJamRecovery
HWResolution
ImagingBBox
InputAttributes
• 0 - Tray 1
• 1 - Tray 2
• 2 - Envelope Feeder
• 3 - Tray 3
• 4 - Multipurpose Feeder
• 5 - Tray 4
• 6 - Tray 5
— PageSize
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-6
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
4-53
4-53
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-54
4-55
4-57
— MatchAll
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
— MediaColor
— MediaType
— MediaWeight
— InputLocation
• Mode
• Priority
Install
Jog
ManualFeed
ManualFeedTimeout
MediaColor
MediaPosition
MediaType
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
MediaWeight
NumCopies
Nup
NupDetails
• Rows
• Columns
• Orientation
• Border
• Order
• Type
• LandscapeOverride
OutputAttributes
• 0 - Standard Bin
• 1 - Optional Bin 1
• 2 - Optional Bin 2
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-7
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
4-57
4-57
4-57
4-58
4-58
4-58
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-59
4-60
• 3 - Optional Bin 3
• 4 - Optional Bin 4
• 5 - Optional Bin 5
• 6 - Optional Bin 6
• 7 - Optional Bin 7
• 8 - Optional Bin 8
• 9 - Optional Bin 9
• 10 - Optional Bin 10
— OutputType
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
— OutputLocation
OutputPage
OutputType
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PageDeviceName
PageSize
Policies
• PolicyNotFound
• PolicyReport
• PageSize
PostRenderingEnhance
PostRenderingEnhanceDetails
• REValue
ꢀ
• Type
PowerSave
ProcessColorModel
Punch
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
SlipSheet
SlipSheetDetails
• SlipSheetSource
• Type
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-8
Table C-2: Page Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
4-60
4-60
4-61
4-61
Staple
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
TraySwitch
Tumble
UniversalDetails
• Type
• PageSize
• Orientation
• Prompt
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Table C-3: User Interpreter Parameters
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
4-62
4-62
Default
AccurateScreens
CollatedCopies
false
ꢀ
ꢀ
Collation - Collated
Copies (QTY) value
HalftoneMode
IdiomRecognition
JobName
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-63
0
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
true
( )
JobTimeout
JobTimeout system
parameter
MaxDictStack
MaxExecStack
MaxFontItem
MaxFormItem
MaxLocalVM
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-63
255
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
10015
12500
100000
2147483647
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-9
Table C-3: User Interpreter Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
4-64
Default
MaxOpStack
MaxPatternItem
MaxScreenItem
MaxSuperScreen
MaxUPathItem
MinFontCompress
PageCount
100000
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
20000
48000
1024
5000
2147483647
0
UseOldcopypage
VMReclaim
false
0
VMThreshold
WaitTimeout
25000 per MB of RAM
WaitTimeout system
parameter
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
4-65
4-65
4-65
4-65
4-65
4-66
4-66
4-66
BuildTime
ꢀ
ByteOrder
CurDisplayList
CurFontCache
CurFormCache
CurInputDevice
CurOutlineCache
CurOutputDevice
ꢀ
ꢀ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-10
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
CurPatternCache
CurScreenStorage
CurSourceList
4-66
4-66
4-66
4-66
4-66
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-67
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
4-68
CurUPathCache
DisableFastProcs
DoPrintErrors
DoStartPage
EnableExtraFonts
EngineBoot
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
EngineCode
EngineSpeed
EnvironmentSave
FactoryDefaults
FatalErrorAddress
FontResourceDir
FontVersion
ꢀ
ꢀ
GenericResourceDir
GenericResourcePathSep
InstalledRam
JobTimeout
languagelevel
MaxDisplayList
MaxFontCache
MaxFormCache
MaxImageBuffer
MaxOutlineCache
MaxPatternCache
MaxPermanentVM
MaxRasterMemory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-11
Table C-4: System Interpreter Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Default values are listed.
Key
Page
MaxScreenStorage
MaxSourceList
MaxUPathCache
PageCount
4-68
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-69
4-70
4-70
4-70
4-70
4-64
PanelCode
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PrinterCode
PrinterName
RamSize
RealFormat
Revision
ꢀ
ꢀ
SearchBuiltinFontsFirst
SerialNumber
StartJobPassword
StartupMode
StaticRamSize
SystemParamsPassword
UseOldcopypage
UseOldfonts
ꢀ
ValidNV
WaitTimeout
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-12
Table C-5: Devices Supported
ꢀ Supported
Printer Model
ꢀ Not Supported
n Network version of the
printer model
Device
Page
%ParallelA%
%ParallelB%
%ParallelC%
%ParallelD%
%SerialA%
4-65
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
%SerialB%
%SerialC%
%SerialD%
%LocalTalkA%
%LocalTalkB%
%LocalTalkC%
%LocalTalkD%
%EtherTalkA%
%EtherTalkB%
%EtherTalkC%
%EtherTalkD%
%IR_A%
%IR_B%
%IR_C%
%IR_D%
%USB_A%
%USB_B%
%USB_C%
%USB_D%
%TokenTalkA%
%TokenTalkB%
%TokenTalkC%
%TokenTalkD%
%AppSocketA%
%AppSocketB%
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-13
Table C-5: Devices Supported (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer Model
ꢀ Not Supported
n Network version of the
printer model
Device
Page
%AppSocketC%
%AppSocketD%
%RemotePrinterA%
%RemotePrinterB%
%RemotePrinterC%
%RemotePrinterD%
%PrintServerA%
%PrintServerB%
%PrintServerC%
%PrintServerD%
%LPR_A%
4-65
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
%LPR_B%
%LPR_C%
%LPR_D%
%LexLinkA%
%LexLinkB%
%LexLinkC%
%LexLinkD%
%IP_A%
%IP_B%
%IP_C%
%IP_D%
%EthernetPhysicalA%
%EthernetPhysicalB%
%EthernetPhysicalC%
%EthernetPhysicalD%
%TokenRingPhysicalA%
%TokenRingPhysicalB%
%TokenRingPhysicalC%
%TokenRingPhysicalD%
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-14
Table C-6: Device Parameters
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%Parallel%, %ParallelA%, %ParallelB%, %ParallelC%,
%ParallelD%
DelayedOutputClose
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-72
4-73
4-73
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Enabled
Filtering
Handshake
HasNames
Interpreter
On
OutputDevice
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%Serial%, %SerialA%, %SerialB%, %SerialC%, %SerialD%
Baud
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-73
4-74
4-74
4-74
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
CheckParity
DataBits
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
Filtering
FlowControl
HasNames
HonorDSR
Interpreter
On
Parity
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-15
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
RobustXon
SerialMode
StopBits
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-75
4-75
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%LocalTalk%, %LocalTalkA%, %LocalTalkB%,
%LocalTalkC%, %LocalTalkD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
LocalTalkType
NodeID
On
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%EtherTalk%, %EtherTalkA%, %EtherTalkB%,
%EtherTalkC%, %EtherTalkD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-76
4-77
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
EthernetAddress
EtherTalkType
EtherTalkZone
Filtering
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-16
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
HasNames
Interpreter
NodeID
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-77
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
On
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IR%,
%IR_A%, %IR_B%, %IR_C%, %IR_D%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-77
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
4-78
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %USB%,
%USB_A%, %USB_B%, %USB_C%, %USB_D%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-78
4-79
4-79
4-79
4-79
4-79
4-79
4-79
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-17
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
PSSmartSwitch
Type
4-79
4-79
ꢀ
ꢀ
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%TokenTalk%, %TokenTalkA%, %TokenTalkB%,
%TokenTalkC%, %TokenTalkD%
Address
4-79
4-79
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-80
4-81
4-81
4-81
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Bridging
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
NodeID
On
PCLSmartSwitch
PortLocation
PSSmartSwitch
TokenTalkType
Type
Zone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-18
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%AppSocket%, %AppSocketA%, %AppSocketB%,
%AppSocketC%, %AppSocketD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-81
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
4-81
4-81
4-81
4-81
4-81
4-81
4-81
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PortLocation
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%RemotePrinter%, %RemotePrinterA%,
%RemotePrinterB%, %RemotePrinterC%,
%RemotePrinterD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-82
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PortLocation
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%PrintServer%, PrintServerA%, PrintServerB%,
%PrintServerC%, %PrintServerD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-83
4-83
4-83
4-83
4-83
4-83
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-19
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
PortLocation
Type
4-83
4-83
ꢀ
ꢀ
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %LPR%,
%LPR_A%, %LPR_B%, %LPR_C%, %LPR_D%
Enabled
4-84
4-84
4-84
4-84
4-84
4-84
4-84
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Filtering
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PortLocation
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%LexLink%, %LexLinkA%, %LexLinkB%, %LexLinkC%,
%LexLinkD%
DelayedOutputClose
Enabled
4-84
4-84
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HasNames
Interpreter
On
PortLocation
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device %IP%,
%IP_A%, %IP_B%, %IP_C%, %IP_D%
GatewayAddress
IPAddress
IPAddressDynamic
NetworkMask
On
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
4-85
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Physical
PortLocation
Type
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-20
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%EthernetPhysical%, %EthernetPhysicalA%,
%EthernetPhysicalB%, %EthernetPhysicalC%,
%EthernetPhysicalD%
EthernetAddress
On
4-86
4-86
4-86
4-86
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PortLocation
Type
Device Parameters for the Communication Device
%TokenRingPhysical%, %TokenRingPhysicalA%,
%TokenRingPhysicalB%, %TokenRingPhysicalC%,
%TokenRingPhysicalD%
Address
On
4-86
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
4-86
4-86
4-86
4-86
PortLocation
Speed
Type
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Engine%
BSizeStandard
Darkness
4-86
4-87
4-88
4-88
4-88
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
PageCount
TimeToStandby
Type
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Console%
Language
Type
4-88
4-88
ꢀ
ꢀ
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %Calendar%,
%CalendarA%, %CalendarB%, %CalendarC%,
%CalendarD%
Day
4-88
4-88
4-88
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hour
Minute
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-21
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Month
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-88
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Running
Second
Type
Year
DateTime
DayOfWeekLong
DayOfWeekNum
DayOfWeekShort
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-22
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %disk1%
BlockSize
Free
4-88
4-88
4-88
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
4-89
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HasNames
InitializeAction
LogicalSize
Mounted
PhysicalSize
Removable
Searchable
SearchOrder
Type
Writeable
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %flash1%
BlockSize
Free
4-89
4-89
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
4-90
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HasNames
InitializeAction
LogicalSize
Mounted
PhysicalSize
Removable
Searchable
SearchOrder
Type
Writeable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PostScript Support
C-23
Table C-6: Device Parameters (Continued)
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference parameter descriptions.
Key
Page
Device Parameters for the Parameters Device %rom%
BlockSize
Free
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
4-91
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
HasNames
InitializeAction
LogicalSize
Mounted
PhysicalSize
Removable
Searchable
SearchOrder
Type
Writeable
Table C-7: PostScript Commands: Message Keys
ꢀ Supported
Printer
Model
ꢀ Not Supported
Page numbers reference status message key and
value descriptions.
Key
Page
4-93
4-93
4-93
job
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
status
source
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-1
Index
disk
A
B
drivers
C
communications
ACKNLG*
ERROR*
PE
SLCT
compatibility modes
backward and forward
E
compression
edge to edge printing
See whole page setting
escape commands (PCL emulation)
categorized by function
D
device (flash memory or disk)
directory
printing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-2
G
GL/2 commands
external network adapter
See external print server
H
hard disk
F
file (flash memory or disk)
See disk
I
information messages
interface
filenames
internal network adapter
See internal print server
internal print server
flash memory
J
fonts
L
language switching
PCL emulation
PCL emulation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-3
output bins
P
page, printable
paper sizes
logical page
paper sizes supported
paper trays
M
PCL emulation
macros
printing directory list
PostScript emulation
Printer Job Language (PJL)
MarkVision Professional
media sizes
multipurpose feeder
parameters, PostScript emulation
paper source
N
notation, commands
O
operator intervention
PCL emulation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-4
commands
color extensions
job control
cursor positioning
macros
miscellaneous commands
font creation
page control
font selection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-5
rectangular area fill graphics
status readback
user-defined symbol set
picture frame
font and symbol set support
paper and envelope dimensions
selecting
print model
raster graphics
variables, PJL
physical page
PostScript emulation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-6
paper size commands
paper tray commands
password protecting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-7
Printer Job Language (PJL)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-8
paper handling
34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed 3-
73
Remove Paper <linked set bin
name> 3-73
Remove Paper Output Bin <bin #> 3-
73
paper jams
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-9
command categories
command syntax
commands
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-10
variables
information messages
common variables
printer unique
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-12
LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-13
LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-45
LTRAY3SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY
3-46
printer specifications
protocol
R
receivers
AUTOFD*
BUSY driver
printer languages, selecting
DATA 1-8 Signal
INIT*
SLCTIN*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-14
RS-232C
switching printer languages
symbol sets
S
selecting printer languages
printing directory list
selecting
serial interface
support
RS-232C
syntax, commands
T
test page, printing from PJL
trays
specialty PCL emulation fonts
specifications
PCL emulation
See printer specifications
PostScript emulation
status messages
Printer Job Language (PJL)
Type 1 fonts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
X-15
U
V
variables, PJL
W
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|